8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 1/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 1/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 2/289
Coping Power
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 3/289
editor-in-chief
David H. Barlow, PhD
scientific
advisory board
Anne Marie Albano, PhD
Gillian Butler, PhD
David M. Clark, PhD
Edna B. Foa, PhD
Paul J. Frick, PhD
Jack M. Gorman, MD
Kirk Heilbrun, PhD
Robert J. McMahon, PhD
Peter E. Nathan, PhD
Christine Maguth Nezu, PhD
Matthew K. Nock, PhD
Paul Salkovskis, PhD
Bonnie Spring, PhD
Gail Steketee, PhD
John R. Weisz, PhD
G. Terence Wilson, PhD
Programs That Work ™
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 4/289
Coping PowerCHILD GROUP PROGRAM
F a c i l i t a t o r G u i d e
John E. Lochman • Karen C. Wells • Lisa A. Lenhart
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 5/289
Oxford University Press, Inc., publishes works that further
Oxford University’s objective of excellence
in research, scholarship, and education.
Oxford New York
Auckland Cape Town Dar es Salaam Hong Kong Karachi
Kuala Lumpur Madrid Melbourne Mexico City Nairobi
New Delhi Shanghai Taipei Toronto
With offices in
Argentina Austria Brazil Chile Czech Republic France GreeceGuatemala Hungary Italy Japan Poland Portugal Singapore
South Korea Switzerland Thailand Turkey Ukraine Vietnam
Copyright © by Oxford University Press, Inc.
Published by Oxford University Press, Inc.
Madison Avenue, New York, New York
www.oup.com
Oxford is a registered trademark of Oxford University Press
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior permission of Oxford University Press.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
CIP data on file
ISBN ---- Paper
Printed in the United States of America on acid-free paper
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 6/289
v
About ProgramsThatWork ™
Stunning developments in healthcare have taken place over the last
several years, but many of our widely accepted interventions and strate-
gies in mental health and behavioral medicine have been brought into
question by research evidence as not only lacking benefit, but perhaps,
inducing harm. Other strategies have been proven eff ective using the
best current standards of evidence, resulting in broad-based recommen-
dations to make these practices more available to the public. Several
recent developments are behind this revolution. First, we have arrived
at a much deeper understanding of pathology, both psychologicaland physical, which has led to the development of new, more precisely
targeted interventions. Second, our increased understanding of devel-
opmental issues allows a finer matching of interventions to develop-
mental levels Third, our research methodologies have improved
substantially, such that we have reduced threats to internal and external
validity, making the outcomes more directly applicable to clinical situ-
ations. Third, governments around the world and healthcare systems
and policymakers have decided that the quality of care should improve,
that it should be evidence based, and that it is in the public’s interest to
ensure that this happens (Barlow, ; Institute of Medicine, ).
Of course, the major stumbling block for clinicians everywhere is the
accessibility of newly developed evidence-based psychological interven-
tions. Workshops and books can go only so far in acquainting respon-
sible and conscientious practitioners with the latest behavioral
healthcare practices and their applicability to individual patients. This
new series, Programs ThatWork ™, is devoted to communicating these
exciting new interventions to clinicians on the frontlines of practice.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 7/289
The manuals and workbooks in this series contain step-by-step detailed
procedures for assessing and treating specific problems and diagnoses.
But this series also goes beyond the books and manuals by providing
ancillary materials that will approximate the supervisory process inassisting practitioners in the implementation of these procedures in
their practice.
In our emerging healthcare system, the growing consensus is that
evidence-based practice off ers the most responsible course of action for
the mental health professional. All behavioral healthcare clinicians
deeply desire to provide the best possible care for their patients. In this
series, our aim is to close the dissemination and information gap and
make that possible.
This facilitator guide is designed to be used by clinicians who are run-
ning a children’s group for the Coping Power Program. Coping Power
is a proven intervention aimed at teaching aggressive children how to
recognize their feelings and display them appropriately without resort-
ing to angry or violent behaviors. Over the course of two school years
and weekly group meetings, middle school students meet and partic-
ipate in activities, exercises, and role-plays that reinforce the themes of
the program. Topics include the importance of setting and achieving
goals, using problem-solving methods to resolve conflicts, and using
self-statements, relaxation, and distraction techniques to cope with
anger arousal.
This comprehensive guide uses an easy to follow session-by-session
format to systematically deliver the intervention to children. It provides
the facilitator or group leader with detailed procedures for working
with children, including sample dialogues, role-play exercises, group
activities, and homework assignments.
David H. Barlow, Editor-in-Chief,
ProgramsThatWork ™
Boston, Massachusetts
vi
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 8/289
vii
Contents
Chapter Introductory Information for Child
Group Facilitators
Chapter Child Group Logistics
Coping Power Child Program: Year 1
Chapter Session : Group Structure and Behavioral
Goal Setting Procedure
Chapter Session : Goal Setting – Part I
Chapter 5 Session : Goal Setting – Part II
Chapter Session : Organizational and Study Skills
Chapter 7 Session : Awareness of Feelings and
Physiological Arousal Related to Anger – Part I
Chapter Session : Awareness of Feelings and
Physiological Arousal Related to Anger – Part II
Chapter Session 7: Anger and Self-Control
Chapter Session : Using Self-Statements for Anger Coping –
Part I
Chapter Session : Using Self-Statements for
Anger Coping – Part II
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 9/289
Chapter Session : Using Self-Statements for
Anger Coping – Part III
Chapter Session : Relaxation and Overcoming Barriers to
Self-Control
Chapter Session : Perspective Taking – Part I
Chapter Session : Perspective Taking – Part II
Chapter Session : Perspective Taking – Part III
Chapter 7 Session : Perspective Taking and Problem Solving
Chapter Session : Social Problem Solving – Part I
Chapter Session 7: Social Problem Solving – Part II
Chapter Session : Social Problem Solving – Part III
Chapter Session : Social Problem Solving – Part IV
Chapter Session : Group Creates Videotape – Part I
Chapter Session : Group Creates Videotape – Part II
Chapter Session : Group Creates Videotape – Part III
Coping Power Program: Year 2
Chapter Session : Review From Previous Year
Chapter Session : Organizational and Study Skills
Review
Chapter 7 Session : Application of Social Problem Solving to
Teacher Conflict
Chapter Session : Application of Social Problem
Solving to Both Making Friends and Being
Friends With Others
viii
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 10/289
Chapter Session 7: Application of Social Problem
Solving to Group Entry and Negotiation
With Peers
Chapter Session : Sibling Conflict and
Problem Solving
Chapter Session : Application of Social Problem Solving
to Peer Pressure
Chapter Session : Refusal Skills
Chapter Session : Problem Solving About NeighborhoodProblems, Deviant Peer Groups, and Centrality of
Group Membership
Chapter Session : Group Creates Peer Pressure Poster
Chapter Session : Positive Quality Development and Peer
Relationships
Chapter Session : Review and Termination of the Coping Power Program
Chapter End of the Year Party
References
About the Authors
ix
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 11/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 12/289
1
Chapter 1 Introductory Information for Child Group
Facilitators
Background Information and Purpose of This Program
The Coping Power Program is based on a contextual social-cognitive
model of childhood aggression (Lochman & Wells, a; Lochman,
Wells, & Murray, ), which is a risk marker for later adolescent
substance use and delinquency and can usefully serve as conceptual
framework for cognitive-behavioral intervention. This model indicates
two relevant sets of potential mediators of adolescent antisocial behav-
ior: () child level factors (e.g., Tremblay & LeMarquand, ), includ-ing children’s poor social-cognitive and decision-making skills, poor
self-regulation, perceived peer context, and poor ability to resist peer
pressure, and () contextual factors, including poor parental caregiver
involvement with, and discipline of, the child (e.g., Wasserman &
Seracini, ). It is assumed that broader contextual risk factors, such
as the level of neighborhood violence (Luthar, ), a ff ect these medi-
ational processes and children’s subsequent behavior. The Coping Power
Program, based on this model, is provided primarily to preadolescent
and early adolescent aggressive children and their parents.
The Coping Power Program includes a child component, consisting of a
-session group intervention, and a coordinated -session parent com-
ponent; both of these are designed to be delivered over a - to -month
period of time. On the basis of outcome research (Lochman & Wells,
), we strongly recommend that the Coping Power parent and child
components be used together , since the best eff ects are achieved through
a combination approach. Nevertheless, the components can be used
alone with appropriate attention to minor adaptation.
The Coping Power Program is often delivered near the time of chil-
dren’s transition to middle school. Intervention can begin in the
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 13/289
2
year prior to the middle-school transition (typically fifth grade) and
continue into the first year in middle school (typically sixth grade),
although the program is generally developmentally appropriate for chil-
dren from the middle elementary school grades through the middleyears of middle school, and can be used to cover grades to . Use with
younger or older children requires further adaptation. The Coping
Power Program has been delivered to target children who have been
identified by teacher and parent ratings of children’s aggressive behavior
as being relatively high in aggressive behavior problems, as well as to
children who meet diagnostic criteria for oppositional defiant disorder
and conduct disorder. The Coping Power child and parent componentshave been developed to be delivered in tandem, with certain topics
designed to come up at common times in the parent and child groups.
However, as previously mentioned, the child and parent groups can be
conducted individually and separately with minor modifications.
This guide provides therapists with an overview of the Coping Power
Program with an emphasis on the child component; a companion guide
provides an overview of the parent component. Child componentgroup sessions can take place at children’s schools (after school, before
school, or during nonacademic homeroom periods) in preventive inter-
ventions or when used by school-based mental health clinicians, or at
mental health outpatient clinics. The program has primarily been
off ered in group session format, although we have used the program in
individual therapy sessions with relatively minor adaptations. Child
group sessions are designed to last for – minutes. The group ses-
sions usually included four to six children. When receiving Coping
Power group sessions, it is recommended that each child also receive a
brief individual session every four to six weeks to encourage generaliza-
tion of intervention eff ects.
The Coping Power child component program addresses the social-
cognitive deficits identified in prior studies, as detailed in the follow-
ing sections. These skills were also the focus of our previously evaluated
-session Anger Coping Program, and the Coping Power child compo-
nent was derived from the earlier Anger Coping Program (Larson &
Lochman, ; Lochman et al., ).
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 14/289
Disorder or Problem Focus
Some children fall outside the normal or typical variations of external-
izing behaviors (Lochman, Barry, Powell, Boxmeyer & Holmes, ). Within this group of disruptive children, aggression is a frequent and
particularly concerning complaint. Aggression is one of the most stable
problem behaviors in childhood with a developmental trajectory
toward negative outcomes in adolescence, such as drug and alcohol use,
truancy and dropout, delinquency, and violence (Lochman & Wayland,
; Lochman, Powell, Whidby, & Fitzgerald, ). Children’s
aggressive behavior patterns may escalate to include a wide range of severe antisocial behaviors in adolescence (Loeber, ), and this neg-
ative antisocial trajectory may even continue into adulthood in the form
of antisocial personality disorder.
Childhood aggressive behavior can thus have serious and negative
implications for a child’s future. The negative eff ects are not limited to
the aggressive individual, however, as aggressive behavior by definition
has the potential to cause harm or injury to others. In today’s schools,aggressive bullying, which may be verbal, physical, or psychological, is
increasingly being recognized as a serious problem (Rigby, ).
Bullying is a deliberate act with the intent of harming the victims
(Farrington, ). Examples of direct bullying include hitting and
kicking, charging interest on goods and stealing, name calling and
intimidation, and sexual harassment. Other forms of bullying that are
more indirect (i.e., relational bullying) include spreading rumors about
peers and gossiping (Ireland & Archer, ).
Children who display high levels of aggressive behavior often exhibit
additional externalizing behaviors and may meet criteria for a disrup-
tive behavior disorder diagnosis such as oppositional defiant disorder
(ODD) or conduct disorder (CD; American Psychiatric Association,
).
Conduct disorder is defined as follows:
■ A repetitive and persistent pattern of behavior that violates the
rights of others or major age-appropriate societal norms or rules.
These behaviors fall into four main groupings: ) aggressive con-
duct that threatens physical harm to other people or animals;
3
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 15/289
) nonaggressive conduct that causes property loss or damage;
) deceitfulness and theft; and ) serious violations of rules. Three
or more characteristic behaviors must have been present during the
past months.
Oppositional de fi ant disorder is defined as follows:
■ A recurrent pattern of negativistic, defiant, disobedient, and
hostile behavior toward authority figures that persists for at least
months and is characterized by the frequent occurrence of at
least four of the following behaviors: losing one’s temper, arguing
with adults, actively defying or refusing to comply with request orrules of adults, deliberately doing things that will annoy other
people, blaming others for one’s own mistakes or misbehavior,
being touchy or easily annoyed by others, being angry and resent-
ful, or being spiteful or vindictive.
Although not an explicit part of the diagnosis, aggression may accompany
the characteristic pattern of negativistic, hostile, and defiant behavior
associated with a diagnosis of ODD. More severe disruptive behaviorsincluding aggression toward people or animals, destruction of property,
theft, and deceit are associated with CD. Prevalence rates for these diag-
noses are estimated to be from % to % of the general population for
ODD and from % to more than % for CD (American Psychiatric
Association, ). It is noteworthy that some researchers are beginning to
identify psychological features that are linked to subsequent psychopathy
(Barry et al., ; Pardini, Lochman & Frick, ; Pardini, Lochman,
& Powell, ). These youth, who display manipulation, impulsivity, and
remorseless patterns of interpersonal behavior, are usually referred to as
“callous” or “unemotional” and are considered to be conceptually diff erent
from youth diagnosed with CD (Cleckley, ; Hart & Hare, ).
Children who display associated narcissistic features are also at risk for
heightened rates of externalizing behavior problems (Barry, Thompson,
Barry, Lochman, Adler, & Hill, ).
Symptoms associated with ODD are age-inappropriate, usually appearing
prior to years of age and no later than adolescence (American Psychiatric
Association, ). These symptoms include angry, defiant, irritable, and
oppositional behaviors and are usually first manifested in the home envi-
ronment. The diagnosis of ODD should be made only if these behaviors
4
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 16/289
occur more frequently than what would be typically expected of same-aged
peers with a similar developmental level. CD symptoms such as fire
setting, breaking and entering, and running away from home are more
severe and may become evident as early as the preschool years, but thesebehaviors usually occur beginning in middle childhood to middle adoles-
cence. Less severe symptoms (e.g., lying, shoplifting, and physical fighting)
are observed initially, followed by intermediate behaviors such as burglary;
the most severe behaviors (e.g., rape, theft while confronting a victim) usu-
ally emerge last (American Psychiatric Association, ). It is particularly
important for those who provide services to children and adolescents to be
aware of the symptoms of ODD and to provide intervention, becauseODD is a common antecedent to CD. Furthermore, a significant subset
of those individuals diagnosed with CD, particularly those with an early
onset, subsequently develop antisocial personality disorder (ASPD;
American Psychiatric Association, ). See Table . for DSM-IV-TR
diagnostic criteria for ODD and CD.
In terms of gender, ODD is more prevalent in males than in females prior
to puberty, though the rates are fairly equal after puberty. ODD symp-toms are typically similar in males and females, with the exception of
males exhibiting more confrontational behavior and having more persist-
ent symptoms (American Psychiatric Association, ). Rates of CD
diagnoses, particularly the childhood-onset type, are more common in
males than in females. According to the American Psychiatric Association
(), males with CD usually evidence symptoms such as “fighting,
stealing, vandalism, and school discipline problems” and females usually
engage in “lying, truancy, running away, substance use, and prostitution.”
Childhood disorders rarely occur in isolation, so comorbidity issues are
important to consider when treating children within clinical populations
(Hinshaw & Lee, ). ODD and CD are often observed in conjunc-
tion with attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), academic
underachievement and learning disabilities, and internalizing disorders
(e.g., depression and anxiety disorders). Among youth with CD and
ODD, % also have a diagnosis of ADHD (Hinshaw & Lee, ).
Furthermore, the hyperactive-impulsive subtype of ADHD is more closely
associated with aggression than the inattentive subtype. ODD in con-
junction with ADHD increases the likelihood for the development of
early-onset CD symptoms (Hinshaw, Lahey, & Hart, ; Loeber, Green,
5
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 17/289
Keenan, & Lahey, ). Children with disruptive behaviors are at a greater
risk for school dropout and thus becoming part of a deviant peer group in
their neighborhood. Moreover, children with both conduct problems and
depressive symptomatology are more likely to engage in substance use asadolescents than those children with conduct problems alone.
Diagnostic Criteria for ODD and CD
In Table . we list the DSM-IV-TR criteria for ODD and CD.
Table 1.1 Diagnostic Criteria for Oppositional Defiant Disorder and Conduct Disorder
DSM-IV-TR Diagnostic DSM-IV-TR Diagnostic Criteria for Conduct
Criteria for ODD Disorder
6
A pattern of negativistic, hostile, and
defiant behavior lasting at least months,
during which four (or more) of the
following are present:
. Often loses temper
. Often argues with adults
. Often actively defies or refuses to
comply with adults’ requests or rules
. Often deliberately annoys people
. Often blames others for his or hermistakes or misbehavior
. Is often touchy or easily annoyed
by others
. Is often angry and resentful
. Is often spiteful or vindictive
A repetitive and persistent pattern of behavior in which
the basic rights of others or major age-appropriate soci-
etal norms or rules are violated, as manifested by the
presence of three (or more) of the following criteria in
the past months, with at least one criterion present
in the past months:
Aggression to People and Animals
. Often bullies, threatens, or intimidates others
. Often initiates physical fights
. Has used a weapon that can cause serious
physical harm to others (e.g., a bat, brick,
broken bottle, knife, gun)
. Has been physically cruel to people
. Has been physically cruel to animals
. Has stolen while confronting a victim (e.g., mug-
ging, purse snatching, extortion, armed robbery)
. Has forced someone into sexual activity
Destruction of Property
. Has deliberately engaged in fire setting with the
intention of causing serious damage
. Has deliberately destroyed others’ property (other
than by fire setting)
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 18/289
7
There are no separate codes based upon age
of onset for ODD.
There are no specified levels of severity
for ODD.
Deceitfulness or Theft
. Has broken into someone else’s house, building,
or car
. Often lies to obtain goods or favors or to avoid
obligations (i.e., “cons” others)
. Has stolen items of nontrivial value without
confronting a victim (e.g., shoplifting, but
without breaking and entering; forgery)
Serious Violation of Rules
. Often stays out at night despite parental prohi-
bitions, beginning before age years
. Has run away from home overnight at least
twice while living in parental or parental surro-
gate home (or once without returning for a
lengthy period)
. Is often truant from school, beginning before
age years
CD, Childhood-Onset Type: Onset of at least one
criterion characteristic of CD prior to age years
CD, Adolescent-Onset Type: Absence of any criteria
characteristic of CD prior to age years
CD, Unspecified Onset: age of onset is not known
Mild: few if any conduct problems in excess of those
required to make the diagnosis and conduct problemscause only minor harm to others
Moderate: number of conduct problems and eff ect on
others intermediate between “mild” and “severe”
Severe: many conduct problems in excess of those
required to make the diagnosis or conduct problems
cause considerable harm to others
DSM-IV-TR Diagnostic DSM-IV-TR Diagnostic Criteria for Conduct
Criteria for ODD Disorder
Development of This Treatment Program and Evidence Base
A series of research studies have been conducted with the Coping Power
Program, and its predecessor, the Anger Coping Program. In addition to
case studies (Boxmeyer, Lochman, Powell, Yaros, & Wojnaroski, ;
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 19/289
Lochman, Boxmeyer, Powell, Wojnaroski, & Yaros, ) that have indi-
cated how the program can be used and adapted with individual cases,
efficacy, eff ectiveness, and dissemination studies described in this section
have provided the evidence base for the Coping Power Program.
Earlier Outcome Research With the Anger Coping Program
The Coping Power Program was developed from earlier intervention
research conducted by Dr. Lochman and his colleagues with the
Anger Coping Program, starting with initial positive behavioralchanges found in an uncontrolled pilot study (Lochman, Nelson, &
Sims, ). The Anger Coping Program, unlike the later Coping
Power Program, had only an intervention component for children,
with no parent component. In a subsequent controlled study,
aggressive and disruptive fourth- to sixth-grade boys were randomly
assigned to: Anger Coping-Goal Setting (AC-GS), Anger Coping
(AC), Goal Setting (GS), and an Untreated Control (UC) condition
(Lochman, Burch, Curry, & Lampron, ) groups. The boys in
the AC and AC-GS groups reduced their independently observed
disruptive-aggressive classroom behavior and had reduced parent rat-
ings of aggression, while the boys in the GS and UC conditions
became worse on these measures by the -month follow-up. The
improvement on the parents’ ratings indicated that the interventions’
eff ects had generalized out of the school setting. Secondary analyses
indicated that certain subject characteristics significantly predictedintervention outcome. Within the two cognitive-behavioral condi-
tions, the boys who demonstrated most behavior change had the
poorest initial social problem-solving skills (Lochman, Lampron,
Burch, & Curry, ). In another study of child characteristics
that predict child-only intervention outcomes, Lochman, Coie,
Underwood, and Terry () found that a social relations program
that included cognitive-behavioral and social-skill training compo-
nents adapted from the Anger Coping Program had significant impact
at post-intervention and at a -year follow-up only with aggressive-
rejected children and not with rejected-only children.
A long-term, -year follow-up study of the preventive eff ects of the Anger
Coping Program found that, in comparison to the untreated aggressive
8
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 20/289
group, the boys in the Anger Coping Program had significantly lower
rates of marijuana and drug involvement and lower rates of alcohol use,
and they maintained their previously noted improvements in self-esteem
and in social problem-solving skills (Lochman, ). In all these areas,the Anger Coping boys were functioning in the same range as that of the
nonaggressive boys at follow-up. However, there were no longer-term
preventive eff ects on delinquency, and the classroom behavioral improve-
ments faded. Only a subset of Anger Coping boys who had received a
second-year booster intervention maintained their reductions in passive
off -task classroom behavior, a result suggesting that a longer intervention
period might be necessary to enhance the maintenance of overt classroombehavioral change. These findings were encouraging, especially because of
the longer-term reduction in substance use for the Anger Coping chil-
dren, and led to the inclusion of the Anger Coping Program as a promis-
ing, empirically supported intervention for aggressive children in critical
reviews of the intervention literature (e.g., Brestan & Eyberg, ;
Greenberg et al., ; Leff , Power, Manz, Costigan, & Nabors, ).
This series of Anger Coping studies indicated the need for a broader,
multicomponent intervention to have more lasting impact on serious
antisocial outcomes, thus the development of the Coping Power
Program.
Coping Power Program: Efficacy Study
The Coping Power Program described in this chapter includes a childcomponent and a parent component. It was derived from the social-
cognitive contextual model described in greater detail later in the chap-
ter. In an initial efficacy study of the Coping Power Program, Lochman
and Wells (a; ) randomly assigned aggressive boys (%
African-American, % white non-Hispanic) from Durham, NC, to
one of three conditions: a cognitive-behavioral Coping Power child
component, combined Coping Power child and behavioral parent
training components, and an untreated control group. The two inter-
vention conditions took place during fourth and fifth grades or
fifth and sixth grades, and intervention lasted for . school years.
Screening of risk status took place in elementary schools, and was
based on a multiple-gating approach using teacher and parent ratings
9
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 21/289
of children’s aggressive behavior. The at-risk boys were in the top
% of boys according to teachers’ ratings of all the students in their
classrooms.
Analyses of outcomes at -year follow-up indicated that the intervention
cells (child component only; child-plus-parent components) showed
reductions in children’s self-reported delinquent behavior, and in
parent-reported alcohol and marijuana use by the child and improve-
ments in their teacher-rated functioning at school during the follow-up
year, in comparison to the high-risk control condition (Lochman &
Wells, ). The Coping Power intervention eff ects on lower rates of
parent-rated substance use and of delinquent behavior at the -year
follow-up than for the control condition were most apparent for the
children and parents who received the full Coping Power Program with
both child and parent components. In contrast, boys’ teacher-rated
behavioral improvements in school during the follow-up year appeared
to be primarily influenced by the Coping Power child component.
Mediation analyses, using path analytic techniques, indicate that the
intervention eff ect for both of the intervention cells on the delinquency,parent-reported substance use, and teacher-rated improvement
outcomes at -year follow-up were mediated by intervention-produced
improvements in children’s internal locus of control, parents’ consis-
tency in disciplining their children, children’s attributional biases,
children’s person-perception skills, and children’s expectations that
aggression would not work for them (Lochman & Wells, a).
Coping Power Program: Effectiveness Studies
Given these positive findings from the efficacy study, the next research
questions examined whether the Coping Power Program has similar pos-
itive eff ects in other settings and with personnel who are more equiva-
lent to typical school and agency sta ff . Several types of eff ectiveness and
dissemination studies have been conducted with the Coping PowerProgram, including studies described later of intervention eff ects on
children’s aggressive behavior and problem-solving skills among aggres-
sive deaf children (Lochman et al., ) and among children with
CD and ODD in Dutch outpatient clinics (van de Wiel, Matthys,
10
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 22/289
Cohen-Kettenis, Maassen, Lochman, & van Engeland, ; van de
Wiel, Matthys, Cohen-Kettenis, & van Engeland, ; Zonnevylle-
Bender, Matthys, van de Wiel, & Lochman, ).
In a more extensive eff ectiveness study, the eff ects of the Coping Power
Program (the combined child and parent components) as an indicated
preventive intervention directed at high-risk children were compared
with the eff ects of a universal, classroom-level preventive intervention
(Lochman & Wells, b). A total of male and female aggressive
fourth-grade students (% African-American) were randomly assigned
to one of four conditions. Children were selected from elementary
schools in Durham, NC. A greater proportion of these schools were in
the inner-city and in high-poverty areas than was the case for the prior
efficacy study. Intervention began in the fall of the fifth-grade year, and
was delivered by personnel more equivalent to counselors and social
workers in school settings who had higher case loads and less opportu-
nity for home visits. At post-intervention, the three intervention
conditions (Coping Power alone; Coping Power plus classroom inter-
vention; classroom intervention alone) produced lower rates of sub-stance use than in the control cell (Lochman & Wells, b). Children
who received both interventions displayed improvements in their
social competence with peers, and their teachers rated these children as
having the greatest increases in problem-solving and anger-coping skills.
The Coping Power Program also produced reductions in parent-rated
and teacher-rated proactive aggressive behavior, and increases in
teacher-rated behavioral improvement. A -year follow-up of this sam-
ple replicated the findings of the prior efficacy study. Coping Power
children were found to have lower rates of self-reported substance use
and delinquency and lower levels of teacher-rated aggressive social
behavior at school, in comparison to the control children (Lochman &
Wells, ). Recent analyses conducted with growth curve modeling
have found that at -year follow-up after the end of treatment, positive
intervention eff ects on youths’ problem behaviors at school have been
maintained (Lochman, Qu, Chen, Roth, Barth, & Wells, ).
In a second type of eff ectiveness study, an abbreviated form of the
Coping Power Program ( child sessions, parent sessions) was
delivered to children and parents in a rural-to-suburban Southern city.
Two hundred and forty children who had been identified as being in the
11
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 23/289
top % of aggressive children in their schools were randomly assigned
to intervention and control conditions. Children receiving Coping
Power during fifth grade had significant reductions in teachers’ behav-
iors by the end of intervention, in comparison to control children(Lochman, Boxmeyer, Powell, Roth, & Windle, ). This finding
indicates that the intervention could be transported to a diff erent set-
ting in a somewhat abbreviated form.
Coping Power Program: Dissemination Studies
The Coping Power Program, which had produced eff ects with hearing
children in the prior studies, was adapted and disseminated in this study
for use with deaf children (Lochman et al., ). Deaf children in a res-
idential school were screened for aggressive behavior (N ) through
use of teacher ratings, and were randomly assigned by classroom to the
Coping Power Program or to a wait-list control condition. The children
in the Coping Power Program attended group sessions and their teach-
ers and dormitory sta ff received training to influence the context around
the children, but there was no component for parents. The Coping
Power parent component was used as a guide for training of teachers and
dormitory sta ff , and the Coping Power child component was adapted to
meet the needs of the deaf children. According to teacher ratings,
Coping Power children displayed behavioral improvement across the
intervention year in comparison to control children (eff ect size: .), and
the Coping Power children displayed significant improvements in theirsocial problem-solving skills and in their communication skills. This
small-scale dissemination study suggested that the Coping Power
Program could be adapted to meet the needs of specialized populations
in residential settings, such as deaf children who have unique communi-
cation difficulties.
In a Coping Power dissemination study of Dutch children with disrup-
tive behavior disorder, Dr. Walter Matthys and his colleagues developeda briefer Dutch version of the Coping Power Program following train-
ing from Dr. Lochman in the Coping Power Program. Dr. Matthys
examined its eff ects in a treatment study in which ODD and CD
children in a child psychiatry outpatient clinic were randomly assigned
12
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 24/289
to Coping Power or to a care-as-usual (C) condition. Children in both
conditions displayed significant improvements in disruptiveness at the
end of treatment and at -month follow-up, but the Coping Power chil-
dren had significantly greater reduction in overt aggressive behavior by post-treatment (van de Wiel et al., ). These positive treatment out-
comes of the Coping Power Program occurred even though the Coping
Power intervention sta ff had significantly less clinical experience than
the care-as-usual therapists. The Coping Power Program was also found
to be highly cost-eff ective (van de Wiel, et al., ). A -year follow-
up study of this sample found that Coping Power had a preventive
eff ect in producing significantly lower marijuana and tobacco use, incomparison to the control condition, indicating long-lasting eff ects of
the intervention on substance use with a sample of disruptive behavior
disorder children (Zonnevylle-Bender, Matthys, van de Wiel, &
Lochman, ).
What Is Coping Power Based On?
Risk and Causal Factors Within a Contextual Social-Cognitive Model
The contextual social-cognitive model (Lochman & Wells, a), which
is derived from etiological research on childhood aggression, indicates that
certain family and community background factors (neighborhood prob-
lems; maternal depression, low social support, marital conflict, low socio-economic status) have both a direct eff ect on children’s externalizing
behavior problems and an indirect eff ect through their influence on key
mediational processes (parenting practices, children’s social cognition and
emotional regulation, children’s peer relations) (Lochman, Barry, Powell,
Boxmeyer & Holmes, ). A child’s developmental course is set within
the child’s social ecology, and an ecological framework is required
(Lochman, ). Risk factors that are biologically related will be noted
first, followed by contextual factors in the model and, finally, by their
impact on children’s developing social-cognitive and emotional regulation
processes. The malleable child and parent risk factors within this model
serve as the targets for intervention in the Coping Power Program, and this
13
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 25/289
model of risk factors can be used to assess children to adapt the program
to various subtypes and individual children.
Biological and Temperament Factors
With regard to biological and temperamental child factors, some pre-
natal factors such as maternal exposure to alcohol, methadone,
cocaine, and cigarette smoke and severe nutritional deficiencies
(Brennan, Grekin, & Mednick, ; Delaney-Black et al., ;
Kelly, Davis, & Henschke, ; Rasanen et al., ) have been foundto have direct eff ects on child aggression. However, in diathesis-stress
models it is more commonly found that aggression is the result of
interactions between child risk factors and environmental factors
(Masten, Best, & Garmezy, ). Thus, risk factors such as birth com-
plications, genes, cortisol reactivity, testosterone, abnormal serotonin
levels, and temperament all contribute to children’s conduct problems,
but only when environmental factors such as harsh parenting or low
socioeconomic status are present (Coon, Carey, Corley, & Fulker, ;
Dabbs & Morris, ; Raine, Brennan, & Mednick, ; Scarpa,
Bowser, Fikretoglu, Romero, & Wilson, ).
Examples of these diathesis-stress models abound in the literature on
child-level risk factors. Birth complications involving preeclampsia,
umbilical cord collapse, forceps delivery, and fetal hypoxia increase the
risk of later violence among children, but only when the infants subse-
quently experience adverse family environments or maternal rejection
(Arseneault, Tremblay, Boulerice, & Saucier, ; Raine et al., ).
Higher levels of testosterone among adolescents and higher cortisol reac-
tivity to provocations are associated with more violent behavior, but only
when the children or adolescents live in families where they experience
high levels of parental abuse or low socioeconomic status (Dabbs &
Morris, ; Scarpa & Raine, ). Children who have a gene that
expresses only low levels of the enzyme monoamine oxidase A (MAOA)have a higher rate of adolescent violent behavior, but only when they have
experienced high levels of parental maltreatment (Caspi et al., ).
Similar patterns of findings have been obtained when children’s tempera-
ment characteristics have been examined as child-level risk factors. Highly
14
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 26/289
active children (Colder, Lochman, & Wells, ), children with high lev-
els of emotional reactivity (Scaramella & Conger, ), and infants with
difficult temperament (Coon et al., ) are at risk for later aggressive
and conduct problem behavior, but only when they have parents whoprovide poor monitoring or harsh discipline. The children’s family con-
text can serve as a key moderator of children’s underlying propensity for
an antisocial outcome.
Contextual Family Factors
There is a wide array of factors in the family that can a ff ect child aggres-
sion and conduct problems, ranging from poverty to more general stress
and discord within the family. Children’s aggression has been linked to
family background factors such as parent criminality, substance use, and
depression (Barry, Dunlap, Cotton, Lochman, & Wells, ; Loeber
& Stouthamer-Loeber, ; McCarty, McMahon, & Conduct
Problems Prevention Research Group, ), low socioeconomic status
and poverty (Sampson & Laub, ), stressful life events (Barry et al.,
; Guerra, Huesmann, Tolan, VanAcker, & Eron, ), single and
teenage parenthood (Nagin, Pogarsky, & Farrington, ), marital
conflict (Erath, Bierman, and Conduct Problems Prevention Research
Group, in press) and insecure, disorganized attachment (Shaw &
Vondra, ). All of these family factors are intercorrelated, especially
with socioeconomic status (Luthar, ), and low socioeconomic sta-
tus assessed as early as preschool has predicted teacher- and peer-ratedbehavior problems at school (Dodge, Petit, & Bates, ). These broad
family risk factors can influence child behavior through their eff ects on
parenting processes.
Starting as early as the preschool years, marital conflict likely causes
disruptions in parenting, which in turn contribute to children’s high
levels of stress and consequent aggression (Dadds & Powell, ). Both
boys and girls from homes in which marital conflict is high are especial-ly vulnerable to externalizing problems like aggression and conduct dis-
order, even after controlling for age and family socioeconomic status
(Dadds & Powell, ).
15
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 27/289
Parenting Practices
Some of these contextual family processes have their eff ect on children’s
behavior by disrupting parenting. Depressed mothers have higher ratesof inconsistent parenting over time, and inconsistent parenting is the
proximal mediator of children’s problem behavior (Barry, Dunlap,
Lochman, & Wells, ). Parenting processes linked to children’s
aggression (e.g., Patterson, Reid, & Dishion, ; Shaw, Keenan, &
Vondra, ) include () nonresponsive parenting at age , with pacing
and consistency of parent responses not meeting children’s needs; ()
coercive, escalating cycles of harsh parental nattering and child noncom-pliance, starting in the toddler years, especially for children with difficult
temperaments; () harsh, inconsistent discipline; () unclear directions
and commands; () lack of warmth and involvement; and () lack of
parental supervision and monitoring as children approach adolescence.
Parental physical aggression, such as spanking and more punitive discipline
styles, have been associated with oppositional and aggressive behavior in
both boys and girls. Low parental warmth and involvement contribute toparents’ use of physically aggressive punishment practices. Weiss, Dodge,
Bates, and Petit () found that ratings of the severity of parental disci-
pline were positively correlated with teacher ratings of aggression and
behavior problems. In addition to higher aggression ratings, children expe-
riencing harsh discipline practices exhibited poorer social information pro-
cessing even when controlling for the possible eff ects of socioeconomic
status, marital discord, and child temperament. It is important to note that
although such parenting factors are associated with childhood aggression,
child behavior also a ff ects parenting behavior in a bidirectional manner
(Fite, Colder, Lochman, & Wells, ). Children’s temperament can
moderate the relation between parenting practices and children’s problem
behaviors (Colder, Lochman, & Wells, ).
Poor parental supervision has also been associated with child aggression.
Haapasalo and Tremblay () found that boys who fought more often
with their peers reported having less supervision and more punishment
than boys who did not fight. Interestingly, the boys who fought reported
having more rules than the boys who did not fight, suggesting the possi-
bility that parents of aggressive boys may have numerous strict rules that
are difficult to follow.
16
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 28/289
Parents’ attributional styles, or the way they think about the causes of
their children’s behavior, and the eff ectiveness of various parenting tech-
niques are related to childhood aggression (Baden & Howe, ;
Dix & Lochman, ). For example, mothers of conduct-disorderedchildren are more likely to see children’s misbehavior as intentional and
to attribute the causes to stable factors within the child that are out-
side of the mother’s control. Research also suggests that poor parental
problem-solving skills in interactions with their children are linked
with their children’s aggression and behavior problems (Pakasiahti,
Asplund-Peltola, & Keltlkangas-Jarvinen, ).
Contextual Peer Factors
Children with disruptive behaviors are at risk for being rejected by their
peers (Cillessen, Van IJzendoorn, Van Lieshout, & Hartup, ),
although other factors including the racial makeup of classrooms also
contribute to children’s peer rejection (Jackson, Barth, Powell, &
Lochman, ). Childhood aggressive behavior and peer rejection inde-
pendently predict delinquency and conduct problems in adolescence
(Lochman & Wayland, ; Miller-Johnson, Coie, Maumary-Gremaud,
Bierman, & Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group, ).
Aggressive children who are also socially rejected tend to exhibit more
severe behavior problems than children who are either aggressive only or
rejected only. Similar to bidirectional relations evident between the degree
of parental positive involvement with their children and children’s aggres-sive behavior over time (Bry, Catalano, Kumpfer, Lochman, &
Szapocznik, ), children’s aggressive behavior and their rejection by
their peers both reciprocally a ff ect each other (Conduct Problems
Prevention Research Group, a). Children who have overestimated
perceptions of their actual social acceptance can be at particular risk for
aggressive behavior problems in some settings (Pardini, Barry, Barth,
Lochman, & Wells, ).
Despite the compelling nature of these findings, race and gender may
moderate the relation between peer rejection and negative adolescent
outcomes. For example, Lochman and Wayland () found that peer
rejection ratings of African-American children within a mixed-race
17
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 29/289
classroom did not predict subsequent externalizing problems in adoles-
cence, whereas peer rejection ratings of Caucasian children were associ-
ated with future disruptive behaviors. Similarly, whereas peer rejection
can predict serious delinquency in boys, it can fail to do so with girls(Miller-Johnson, Coie, Maumary-Gremaud, Lochman, & Terry, ).
As children with conduct problems enter adolescence they tend to asso-
ciate with deviant peers. It is believed that many of these teens have
been continually rejected from more prosocial peer groups because they
lack appropriate social skills and, as a result, turn to antisocial cliques as
their only means for social support (Miller-Johnson et al., ). The
tendency for aggressive children to associate with one another increases
the probability that their aggressive behaviors will be maintained or will
escalate because of modeling eff ects and reinforcement of deviant
behaviors (e.g., Dishion, Andrews, & Crosby, ). The relation
between childhood conduct problems and adolescent delinquency is at
least partially mediated by deviant peer group a ffiliation (Vitaro,
Brendgen, Pagani, Tremblay, & McDuff , ).
Contextual Community and School Factors
In addition to family interaction problems, peer rejection, and involvement
in deviant peer groups, neighborhood and school environments have also
been found to be risk factors for aggression and delinquency over and above
the variance accounted for by family characteristics (Kupersmidt, Griesler,
DeRosier, Patterson, & Davis, ). Exposure to neighborhood violence
increases children’s aggressive behaviors (e.g., Colder, Mott, Levy, & Flay,
; Guerra, Huesmann, & Spindler, ) and their beliefs about aggres-
sion (Guerra et al., ), and begins to have heightened eff ects on the
development of antisocial behavior during the middle childhood, preado-
lescent years (Ingoldsby & Shaw, ). Neighborhood problems have
eff ects on parenting behaviors (Pinderhughes, Nix, Foster, Jones, &
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group, ) and have a directimpact on children’s aggressive, antisocial behaviors (Greenberg, Lengua,
Coie, Pinderhughes, & Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group,
; Schwab-Stone et al., ), above and beyond the eff ects of poor par-
enting practices. Early onset of aggression and violence has been associated
18
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 30/289
with neighborhood disorganization and poverty partly because children
who live in lower socioeconomic status and disorganized neighborhoods are
not well supervised, engage in more risk-taking behaviors, and experience
the deviant social influences that are apparent in problematic crime-riddenneighborhoods.
Schools can further exacerbate children’s conduct problems, as children
experience frustration from academic demands and from peer
influences. The density of aggressive children in classroom settings can
increase the amount of aggressive behavior emitted by individual stu-
dents (Barth, Dunlap, Dane, Lochman, & Wells, ; Kellam, Ling,
Mersica, Brown, & Ialongo, ).
Social Information Processing
Based on children’s temperament and biological dispositions, as well as
children’s contextual experiences from their family, peers, and commu-
nity, they begin to form stable patterns of processing social information(Dodge, Laird, Lochman, Zelli & Conduct Problems Prevention
Research Group, ) and regulating their emotions. Children’s emo-
tional reactions such as anger can contribute to later substance use and
other antisocial behavior, especially when children have not developed
good inhibitory control (Pardini, Lochman, & Wells, ). The con-
textual social-cognitive model (Lochman & Wells, a) stresses the
reciprocal interactive relationships between children’s initial cognitive
appraisal of problem situations, their eff orts to think about solutions to
the perceived problems, children’s physiological arousal, and their
behavioral response. The level of physiological arousal will depend on
the individual’s biological predisposition to become aroused, and will
vary depending on the interpretation of the event (Williams, Lochman,
Phillips, & Barry, ). The level of arousal will further influence the
social problem solving, operating either to intensify the fight-or-flight
response or interfere with the generation of solutions. Because of theongoing and reciprocal nature of interactions, it may be difficult for
children to extricate themselves from aggressive behavior patterns.
Aggressive children have cognitive distortions at the appraisal phases of
social-cognitive processing because of difficulties in encoding incoming
19
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 31/289
social information and in accurately interpreting social events and oth-
ers’ intentions. They also have cognitive deficiencies at the problem-
solving phases of social-cognitive processing shown by their generating
maladaptive solutions for perceived problems and having non-normativeexpectations for the usefulness of aggressive and nonaggressive solutions
to their social problems. In the appraisal phases of information process-
ing, aggressive children have been found to recall fewer relevant cues
about events (Lochman & Dodge, ), base interpretations of events
on fewer cues (Dodge, Pettit, McClaskey, & Brown, ), selectively
attend to hostile rather than neutral cues (Gouze, ), and recall the
most recent cues in a sequence, with selective inattention to earlier pre-sented cues (Milich & Dodge, ). At the interpretation stage
of appraisal processing, aggressive children have been shown to have a
hostile attributional bias, as they tend to excessively infer that others are
acting toward them in a provocative and hostile manner (Dodge et al.,
; Lochman & Dodge, ). These attributional biases tend to be
more prominent in reactively aggressive children than in proactively
aggressive children (Dodge, Lochman, Harnish, Bates, & Pettit, ).
The problem-solving stages of information processing begin with the
child accessing the goal that the individual chooses to pursue, and this
will then a ff ect the responses generated for resolving the conflict, which
occurs in the next processing stage. Aggressive children have been found
to have social goals that are more dominance and revenge oriented and
less a ffiliation oriented, than is the case for nonaggressive children
(Lochman, Wayland, & White, ). The fourth information-processing
stage involves a generative process whereby potential solutions for coping
with a perceived problem are recalled from memory. At this stage, aggres-
sive children demonstrate deficiencies in both the quality and the quan-
tity of their problem-solving solutions. These diff erences are most
pronounced for the quality of the solutions off ered, with aggressive
children off ering fewer verbal-assertion solutions (Joff e, Dobson, Fine,
Marriage, & Haley, ; Lochman & Lampron, ), fewer compro-
mise solutions (Lochman & Dodge, ), more direct-action solutions(Lochman & Lampron, ), a greater number of help-seeking or adult
intervention responses (Rabiner, Lenhart, & Lochman, ), and more
physically aggressive responses (Pepler, Craig, & Roberts, ) to hypo-
thetical vignettes describing interpersonal conflicts. The nature of the
20
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 32/289
social problem-solving deficits for aggressive children can vary depending
on their diagnostic classification. Boys with a diagnosis of CD produce
more aggressive and antisocial solutions in vignettes about conflicts with
parents and teachers, and fewer verbal and nonaggressive solutions in peerconflicts, in comparison to boys with ODD (Dunn, Lochman, & Colder,
). Thus, children with CD have broader problem-solving deficits in
multiple interpersonal contexts, in comparison to children with ODD.
The fifth processing step involves a two-step process: first, identifying
the consequences for each of the solutions generated, and second, eval-
uating each solution and consequence in terms of the individual’s
desired outcome. In general, aggressive children evaluate aggressive
behavior as more positive (Crick & Werner, ) than children with-
out aggressive behavior difficulties. Children’s beliefs about the utility of
aggression and about their ability to successfully enact an aggressive
response can operate to increase the likelihood of aggression being dis-
played, as children who hold these beliefs will be more likely to also
believe that this type of behavior will help them to achieve the desired
goals, which then influences response evaluation (Lochman & Dodge,). Deficient beliefs at this stage of information processing are
especially characteristic for children with proactive aggressive behavior
patterns (Dodge et al., ) and for youth who have callous or unemo-
tional traits consistent with early phases of psychopathy (Pardini,
Lochman, & Frick, ). Recent research has found that these beliefs
about the acceptability of aggressive behavior lead to deviant processing
of social cues, which in turn lead to children’s aggressive behavior (Zelli,
Dodge, Lochman, Laird, & Conduct Problems Prevention Research
Group, ), indicating that these information-processing steps have
recursive eff ects rather than strictly linear eff ects on each other.
The final information-processing stage involves behavioral enactment,
or displaying the response that was chosen in the preceding steps.
Aggressive children have been found to be less adept at enacting posi-
tive or prosocial interpersonal behaviors (Dodge et al., ). This inter-
pretation would suggest that improving the ability to enact positive
behaviors may influence aggressive children’s belief about their ability to
engage in these more prosocial behaviors and, thus, functions to change
the response evaluation.
21
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 33/289
Schemas Within the Social-Cognitive Model
Schemas have been proposed to have a significant impact on the infor-
mation-processing steps within the contextual social-cognitive modelunderlying cognitive-behavioral interventions with aggressive children
(Lochman, Magee, & Pardini, ; Lochman & Wells, ). Schemas
can involve children’s expectations and beliefs of others (Lochman et al.,
) and of themselves, including their self-esteem and narcissism
(Barry et al., ). Early in the information-processing sequence, when
the individual is perceiving and interpreting new social cues, schemas
can have a clear, direct eff ect by narrowing the child’s attention to cer-tain aspects of the social cue array (e.g., Lochman, Nelson, & Sims,
). A child who believes it is essential to be in control of others and
who expects that others will try to dominate him or her, often in aver-
sive ways, will attend particularly to verbal and nonverbal signals about
someone else’s control eff orts, easily missing accompanying signs of the
other person’s friendliness or attempts to negotiate. Schemas can also
have indirect eff ects on information processing through the influence of
schemas on children’s expectations for their own behavior and for others’
behavior in specific situations. Lochman and Dodge () found
that aggressive boys’ perceptions of their own aggressive behavior was
22
Community Context
Neighborhood Problem
Family ContextMaternal DepressionLow Social SupportMarital ConflictLow SESParent Aggression
ParentingPracticesContext
Child SocialCognitionand SelfRegulation
Child'sPerceptionof PeerContext
ProximalAggressiveBehavior
Violence andDelinquency
SubstanceAbuse
AcademicFailure
Figure 1.1
Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy Model of Youth Antisocial Behavior (Lochman, ).
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 34/289
primarily a ff ected by their prior expectations, whereas nonaggressive
boys relied more on their actual behavior to form their perceptions.
Risks and Benefits of This Treatment Program
Across a series of efficacy, eff ectiveness, and dissemination studies, there
has been evidence for the utility of the Coping Power Program in reduc-
ing children’s later delinquency, substance use, and problem behaviors
at school. However, it is evident that not all children improve when
using the program. Analyses of moderating factors have not identifiedsystematic subtypes of children with regard to race, gender, or initial
level of severity of problem behavior who may be less likely to be
responsive to the program (e.g., Lochman & Wells, , ); such
analysis will remain a focus of future research. A particular risk to be
considered when using the program has to do with the aggregation of
aggressive children into groups. Prior research has found that group
interventions with antisocial adolescents sometimes have iatrogenic
eff ects, and can produce worse outcomes for these youth through iatro-
genic eff ects, and can produce worse outcomes for these youth through
iatrogenic eff ects due to deviancy training among the youth (Dodge,
Dishion, & Lansford, ). We have not found overall iatrogenic
eff ects in the Coping Power studies, but undoubtedly in some groups of
youth the impact of the program is limited by negative peer influences.
This risk requires careful attention by the therapist, and will be noted
in Chapter .
Alternative Treatments
A variety of alternative treatments exist at diff erent developmental levels
(Lochman, Pardini, Phillips, & McElroy, ) and are summarized here.
Preschool and Early Elementary School
Several programs developed for the preschool and early elementary
school years have shown positive outcome eff ects, and these include the
23
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 35/289
Incredible Years program, parent-child interaction therapy (PCIT), Early
Risers, and Fast Track. Webster-Stratton’s (, ) Incredible Years
Training Series includes videotape modeling parent training, typically
administered in a therapist-led group. During these groups, parents view and discuss video vignettes demonstrating social learning and child
development principles and how parents can use child-directed interac-
tive play, praise, and incentive programs and nonviolent discipline tech-
niques. An advanced version of the program incorporates video vignettes
promoting parents’ personal self-control, communication skills, prob-
lem-solving skills, social support, and self-care. Webster-Stratton has also
developed a child videotape modeling program and teacher training curriculum, which have been shown to enhance outcome eff ects of the
original Incredible Years parent training program (Webster-Stratton &
Hammond, ; Webster-Stratton & Reid, ).
Parent-child interaction therapy (PCIT) was specifically designed to tar-
get the parent and child dyad, with the therapist serving as a coach to
improve the parent and child’s interaction patterns in vivo (Brinkmeyer
& Eyberg, ). Operant-conditioning parenting techniques similar tothose described above are taught using this coaching method, including
a specific system for implementing time-out after a child disobeys a com-
mand. PCIT is used most often with families of preschool-age children
(i.e., between the ages of and ). Significant improvements in children’s
behavior, parenting stress, and parents’ perceptions of control have been
found in families receiving PCIT relative to families in a waitlist control
group. Moreover, these gains are maintained following treatment com-
pletion and generalize to children’s classroom behavior.
Early Risers is a multicomponent, competency-enhancement program
that targets elementary school children (ages to ) who are at high
risk for early development of conduct problems, including substance
use (i.e., who display early aggressive, disruptive, or nonconformist
behaviors) (August, Hektner, Egan, Realmuto, & Bloomquist, ).
Intervention components include parent education and skills training,
parent–school consultation, child social skills training and strategic peer
involvement, and reading and math instruction and educational enrich-
ment activities.
The Fast Track Program is a comprehensive, long-lasting, multicompo-
nent intervention which starts with children as they enter elementary
24
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 36/289
school (Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group, , ,
b). Fast Track has components for working with children in
social skills groups, in peer-pairing activities, and tutoring. It also has
components for working with parents in parent groups and in homevisits. The program for children targeted at high risk for later negative
outcomes is augmented by a universal prevention program delivered by
teachers.
Preadolescence and Early Adolescence
Problem-solving skills training (PSST) is a program targeted for school-age
antisocial children between and years old. Children attend weekly
sessions lasting approximately minutes each (Kazdin, Siegel, & Bass,
). In PSST the daily interpersonal situations that children face are
emphasized, with specific focus on individual interpersonal deficits. Leaders
teach problem-solving skills such as generating multiple solutions to a
problem and thinking about the consequences. In addition, problem-
solving skills are applied to interpersonal situations with teachers, peers,
siblings, and parents. Techniques such as role-play, reinforcement, model-
ing, and feedback are all used to teach and reward eff ective problem-solv-
ing skills. Children are also given tasks called “super-solvers” which allow
them to practice techniques from the sessions outside of the group with
other people. Parent participation is also an important component of the
training. Parents watch the sessions and serve as a co-leader in addition to
supervising the use of the new skills at home (Kazdin et al., ). Parentsalso learn parent behavioral management skills.
Middle to Late Adolescence
Multisystemic therapy (MST) is an individualized intervention that
focuses on the interaction between adolescents and the multiple environ-
mental systems that influence their antisocial behavior, including their
peers, family, school, and community (Henggler, Melton, & Smith,
). Strategies for changing the adolescent’s behavior are developed in
close collaboration with family members by identifying the major envi-
ronmental drivers that help maintain the adolescent’s deviant behavior.
25
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 37/289
Services are delivered in the family’s natural environment and can include
a variety of treatment approaches including parent training, family ther-
apy, school consultation, marital therapy, and individual therapy.
Although the techniques used within these treatment strategies can vary,many of them are either behavioral or cognitive-behavioral in nature (e.g.,
contingency management, behavioral contracting). Clinicians are guided
by a set of nine MST principles which include concepts like focusing on
systems strengths, delivering developmentally appropriate treatment, and
improving eff ective family functioning. Throughout the intervention, cli-
nician adherence to these treatment principles is closely monitored
through weekly consultation with MST experts.
Functional family therapy (FFT) combines principles from both family
systems theory and cognitive-behavioral approaches to intervene with
antisocial adolescents and their families (Klein, Alexander, & Parsons,
). The clinical practice of FFT has evolved over the past years, and
the most recent version of FFT consists of three intervention phases: ()
engagement and motivation, () behavior change, and () generalization.
During the engagement and motivation phase, the therapist addressesmaladaptive beliefs within the family system in order to increase expecta-
tions for change, reduce negativity and blaming, build respect for individ-
ual diff erences, and develop a strong alliance between the family and the
therapist. The behavior change phase is then used to implement concrete
behavioral interventions designed to improve family functioning by
building relational skills, enhancing positive parenting, improving
conflict management skills, and reducing maladaptive interaction pat-
terns. These behavioral interventions are individualized to fit the charac-
teristics of each family member and the family relational system as a
whole. Finally, the generalization phase of the intervention is used to
improve the family’s ability to competently influence the systems in
which it is embedded (e.g., school, community, juvenile justice system) to
help maintain positive change.
The Adolescents Transition Program (ATP) was designed as a preventative
intervention for middle school youth exhibiting risk factors for the escala-
tion of problem behavior (Dishion & Andrews, ). The program
initially consisted of weekly -minute parent and teen group sessions.
The parent groups consisted of to caregivers and were designed to teach
family management skills such as monitoring, positive reinforcement,
limit setting, and problem solving. Skills taught within the session were
26
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 38/289
reinforced through the use of exercises, role-plays, and discussions about
how the skills can be employed within the home. In addition to these group
sessions, families received three individual consultation sessions.
Multidimensional Treatment Foster Care (MTFC) is an alternative to tra-
ditional group care settings for antisocial youth who are removed from
the care of their parents or guardians. In MTFC, antisocial youth are tem-
porarily placed with a community-based foster family. Contingencies
governing the youth’s behavior are systematically modified through con-
sultation with a comprehensive treatment team (Fisher & Chamberlain,
). As the youth’s behavior improves, a gradual transition is made
from the MTFC setting back to their parent or guardian’s home. Each
foster family is assigned a behavioral support specialist, youth therapist,
family therapist, consulting psychiatrist, parent daily report caller, and
case manager or clinical team manager to assist with program implemen-
tation. Foster parents, who are informally screened for program participa-
tion, engage in a -hour preservice training which provides an overview
of the treatment model and teaches techniques for monitoring and mod-
ifying adolescent behavior. Adolescents are able to earn privileges withinthe foster home by following a daily program of scheduled activities and
fulfilling behavioral expectations. The youth’s biological parents or
guardians assist in the treatment planning, engage in family therapy to
learn eff ective parenting skills, and begin applying newly learned skills
during short home visits. As the family’s functioning improves, the visits
are extended until complete reunification occurs. Family therapists con-
tinue to follow the case for to months following reunification to assist
in the successful resolution of problems that arise.
The Role of Medications
Although we have not had any clinical trials in which we have examined
the adjunctive eff ects of medications with children in our program, we
routinely encourage parents to seek psychiatric evaluation of comorbidconditions that might require medication. Most common is ADHD,
which co-occurs in many of the children with aggressive behavior,
ODD, or CD with whom we intervene. Careful assessment and med-
ical management of ADHD is expected to enhance the Coping Power
intervention eff ects with children who have comorbid ADHD.
27
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 39/289
28
Outline of This Treatment Program
Table 1.2 Topics of Child and Parent or Caregiver Group Sessions
Child Component Parent or Caregiver Component
Session Description Session Description
Year 1
Group Structure and Behavioral
Goal-Setting Procedure
– Goal Setting
Organizational and Study Skills
– Awareness of Feelings and
Physiological Arousal Related
to Anger
Anger Coping and Self-Control
– Using Self-Statements for
Anger Coping
Relaxation and Overcoming
Barriers to Self-Control
– Perspective Taking
Perspective Taking and Problem
Solving
– Social Problem Solving
– Group Creates Videotape
Year 2
Review From Previous Year
Organizational and Study Skills
Review
Application of Social Problem
Solving to Teacher Conflict
Application of Social Problem
Solving to Making Friends
and Being Friends With Others
Application of Social Problem
Solving to Group Entry and
Negotiation With Peers
Introductions, Overview,
and Academic Support
Academic Support in the Home
– Stress Management
Basic Social Learning Theory
and Improving the Parent-Child
Relationship
Ignoring Minor Disruptive
Behavior
Giving Eff ective Instructions toChildren
Establishing Rules and
Expectations
– Discipline and Punishment
Getting Ready for Summer
Academic Support in the
Home – Review Session
Family Cohesion Building
Family Problem Solving
Family Communication
Long-Term Planning,
Termination
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 40/289
The Coping Power child component (Lochman, Lenhart & Wells, )
addresses the social-cognitive deficits identified in prior studies; these
skills were also the focus of our previously evaluated -session Anger
Coping Program (Larson & Lochman, ; Lochman, FitzGerald &
Whidby, ). The Coping Power child component focuses on (a)
establishing group rules and contingent reinforcement, (b) using self-
statements, relaxation, and distraction techniques to cope with angerarousal, (c) identifying problems and social perspective-taking with
pictured and actual social problems situations, (d) generating alternative
solutions and considering the consequences of alternative solutions to
social problems, (e) viewing modeling videotapes of children becoming
aware of physiological arousal when angry, using self-statements (“Stop!
Think! What should I do?”) and using the complete set of problem-
solving skills with social problems, (f) the children planning and making
their own videotape of inhibitory self-statement and social problem solv-
ing with problems of their own choice, (g) enhancing social skills,
involving methods of entering new peer groups and using positive peer
networks (focus on negotiations and cooperation on structured and
unstructured interactions with peer), and (h) coping with peer pressure.
29
Sibling Conflict and ProblemSolving
Application of Social Problem
Solving to Peer Pressure
Refusal Skills
Problem Solving About
Neighborhood Problems, Deviant
Peer Groups, and Centrality of
Group Membership
Group Creates Peer Pressure Poster
Positive Quality Development and
Peer Relationships
Review and Termination of the
Coping Power Program
Child Component Parent or Caregiver Component
Session Description Session Description
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 41/289
The content of the Coping Power parent component is derived from
social learning theory-based parent training programs developed and
evaluated by prominent clinician-researchers in the field of child aggres-
sion (Forehand et al., ; Patterson, Reid, Jones, & Conger, ).Over the course of the sessions, parents learn skills for (a) identifying
prosocial and disruptive behavioral targets in their children using
specific operational terms, (b) rewarding appropriate child behaviors,
(c) giving eff ective instructions and establishing age-appropriate rules
and expectations for their children in the home, (d) applying eff ective
consequences to negative child behaviors, (e) managing child behavior
outside the home, and (f) establishing ongoing family communicationstructures in the home (such as weekly family meetings). In addition to
these basic parent training skills, sessions address stress management for
parents, family cohesion and problem solving, and parents are continu-
ally informed about the skills that children are addressing in their group
sessions so parents can reinforce those skills when they appear.
When the child and parent components of Coping Power are imple-
mented together, certain parent skills are introduced at the same time thatthe respective child skills are introduced, so that parents and children can
work together at home on what they are learning. For example, parents
learn to set up homework support structures and to reinforce organiza-
tional skills around homework completion as children are learning orga-
nizational skills in the Coping Power child component. Likewise, parents
learn the PICC model of problem solving around the same time that their
child learns the model in the child component. Then parent and child are
encouraged to use the PICC model together at home.
Use of the Child Workbook
Because the Coping Power Program is a group intervention, workbooks
have been made available for purchase in sets of eight. Each child in the
group should receive a workbook and be instructed to bring it to every session. Designed specifically for children, the workbook incorporates
an engaging and user-friendly design. It contains all the forms, activity
sheets, and homework assignments essential to the program.
30
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 42/289
31
Chapter 2 Child Group Logistics
Forming a Group
Assessment for Inclusion in Group Therapy
Children are identified for inclusion in this program through parent and
teacher reports of their aggressive behavior. These reports can consist
either of teacher nominations, teacher and parent behavioral ratings, or,
in clinic settings, identification of children with ODD or CD diagnoses.
Once these children are identified, parents will be expected to provideconsent for their children’s involvement in the program, although the
way this will be done will vary widely of course depending on whether
Coping Power is part of an outreach program in the schools or a treat-
ment program in a clinic.
As noted in the introductory chapter, we recommend that the full
Coping Power Program with the child and the parent components be
used. In this chapter, we will describe logistics issues for the childcomponent.
Many factors are believed to contribute to the development and mainte-
nance of aggressive behavior (Lochman, Powell, Whidby & FitzGerald,
). While innate characteristics and contextual factors are outside of
the influence of therapeutic intervention, such programs can address
social competence and social-cognitive skills. These factors are believed to
mediate the negative outcomes of aggressive behavior (Lochman & Wells,a). The social-cognitive model of children’s aggression suggests that
aggressive children demonstrate cognitive distortions when interpreting
incoming social information and evaluating social problems and have
deficiencies in formulating appropriate responses to these problems
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 43/289
32
(Lochman & Wells, a). Consequently, the assessment of a child’s
social-cognitive skills and functioning is central to understanding the
child’s therapeutic needs and likelihood of benefiting from group inter-
vention.
The Coping Power Program for children with conduct problems is an
example of a dual-component (i.e., child component and parent com-
ponent) group intervention for which inclusion is assessment-based.
For school-based preventive interventions, Lochman and Wells have
used a multiple-gating approach to assess children’s behavior for elevat-
ed levels of aggression appropriate for inclusion in the program. First,
teachers rate each of their students on severity of verbal aggression,
physical aggression, and disruptiveness. The –% most aggressive
children are then contacted for inclusion in Gate of the program
screening. For Gate , parents completed the Child Behavior Checklist
(CBCL). Children with T scores below to on these measures have
typically been excluded from the program (Lochman & Wells, ). If
parent ratings are not available, teacher ratings for children’s aggression
have proved to be eff ective screeners for later child maladjustment (Hill,Lochman, Coie, Greenberg, & Conduct Problems Prevention Research
Group, ; Lochman & Conduct Problems Prevention Research
Group, ).
Group Size
The optimal size of the Coping Power child component groups is four
to six children, and two group leaders. However, groups can be
eff ectively led by one therapist if sufficiently prepared and organized for
the session. In our dissemination research, we have had therapists who
have led groups with eight to twelve children. Although not recom-
mended, certain therapists who are highly experienced in handling
group process issues, are able to closely monitor children’s behavior, and
are adept at providing consistent feedback and consequences to youths’behavior can lead larger groups of this size. It is easier to work with
smaller than average groups. The group content can readily be used
with small groups of two or three children, as children can still partici-
pate in role-plays and other activities.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 44/289
Group Meetings and Program Duration
The Coping Power child component has sessions. Sessions are typi-
cally conducted on a weekly basis, although they can be used for two orthree sessions per week if the program is being implemented in a residen-
tial or after-school setting where that is possible. Sessions are designed to
last for – minutes, although we have used the program in school set-
tings where only -minute sessions were possible, and in clinic settings
where -minute sessions were feasible. The program is designed to be
used in a closed group format, because session content builds on prior
sessions. However, the program can be used in a modified closed form, where some children are added up through the halfway point of the
group as long as the new children are provided individual sessions to
present them with condensed content for the sessions they missed and
the existing group members are able to provide review of prior sessions.
Children are expected to have brief individual sessions every four to six
weeks while they are in the group. The individual sessions are meant to
provide opportunities to reinforce generalization of skills that are being practiced in the group, to individualize group-delivered skills to address
children’s particular social problems, and to promote the development of
strong positive bonds with the group leader. The latter is important in
reducing the likelihood of peer deviancy training occurring in the group.
Maintenance or Follow-Up Sessions
Follow-up and maintenance sessions can be provided but they are not
a part of the basic intervention as reported in the efficacy and eff ectiveness
studies of the Coping Power Program. However, a brief six-session booster
program was found to maintain some of the long-term -year follow-up
eff ects of the Anger Coping Program on externalizing behavior outcomes
(Lochman, ). Because of the stability and chronicity of children’s con-
duct problems and the powerful risk-producing eff ects that may be presentin their family, community, and peer environments, there is a natural ten-
dency for intervention-produced improvements to decay for some chil-
dren. Booster or follow-up sessions could potentially help to prevent some
of these relapses.
33
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 45/289
Preparing for Group Meetings
Prior to the first meeting, therapists should identify the space for their
child group session, and determine whether it is spacious enough for a group that will be engaging in role-plays and group activities. Therapists
should also meet with children’s teachers and parents to identify relevant
behavioral goals that the children can address, and should have them cat-
egorize the goals as being relatively easy, moderately hard, or very hard
for the child. Teachers and parents are informed that the therapist and
child will begin with goals that are relatively easy and likely to be achiev-
able before proceeding to more diffi
cult goals.
Before each session, the therapist should assemble the materials needed
for that session, and prepare for the various session activities. In the
sessions on problem solving when children will create their own video-
tape, videotape equipment (or audiotape equipment if videotape is not
available) should be prepared for use.
Group Rules
Children assist in creating group rules during the first group session.
The group should have between six to eight rules. Although chil-
dren’s input is encouraged, rules should include prohibition against
physical contact and fighting, and prohibition against interrupting
others. Confi
dentiality should always be included as one of the grouprules.
Special Issues
Building Group Cohesion
It is important to convey the purpose of the group and to develop
a group structure and format. Taking time up front to form a cohesive
working group will help to establish a solid foundation. This will help
facilitate the process of team building, which is an integral component
of the child intervention.
34
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 46/289
In the initial session (if time permits, or no later than the second session),
engage the students in a discussion pertaining to goal setting. (Given
that some sessions have more content than others, there may be times
when you may need to carry over content from one session to the next.It is important to limit the frequency of doing this in order to avoid get-
ting too far behind.)
Group Needs
While adherence to the objectives outlined in the curriculum is very important for treatment integrity, it is equally important to attend to
the needs of the individual groups. An example may be that as group
members enter the room to begin the meeting, two of the students are
arguing about an incident that took place in the hall while coming
from the classroom. If possible, incorporate this “real life” experience
into the session planned for that day. Sometimes students will bring
problems directly to the group; other times group leaders need to be
actively observing the group to find valuable examples of situations
that occur both inside and outside of the group sessions. Encouraging
students to deal with problem situations that arise can assist them in
overcoming barriers that are getting in their way and allow them the
opportunity to practice problem solving within the context of the
group setting. The more creative and flexible group leaders can be in
the process of implementing the curriculum, the more likely students
will be open and willing participants.
Weekly Goals
The primary purpose of goal setting is to monitor children’s behaviors
and provide daily feedback to children about their classroom behavior
and to provide weekly feedback to group leaders concerning the chil-
dren’s behavior. Having children identify and work on weekly goals, with
the teacher monitoring progress on these goals, enhances the transfer of
the treatment eff ects into the classroom. Goal setting and monitoring
help provide the real-life experiences of focusing and dealing with prob-
lems within the classroom, with these goals generating discussions and
35
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 47/289
role-plays during group sessions. It also involves teachers more closely
with the program and provides one concrete indication of progress being
made by individual group members. This objective is carried on
throughout the course of the intervention. Standard weekly goal sheetsare included in each child’s workbook. Children should have their
teacher initial the goal sheet once each day of the week to indicate
whether or not the goal was achieved. Find a time to talk with each
teacher who will be monitoring goals to explain the goal setting and
monitoring process, and to explain how the goal sheet is to be filled out.
It would also be useful at this time to request a list of possible goals (–)
for the child. Once the goal-setting process is in place (by the end offi
rstor second session), and goals have been selected (in consultation with
group leader and teachers), progress towards goal attainment is moni-
tored and reviewed (at the beginning of each group session), for
the duration of the program. Goals will vary depending on individual
needs. The length of time a child may keep his or her goal may vary as
well. Some students may need to spend several weeks or even months
working on the same goal while other students will change goals more
readily. Again it is based on how well the student is progressing on their
personal goals.
Common problems in the goal setting and monitoring process occur
at the child level and at the teacher and parent levels. Children can for-
get to bring their workbooks with their completed goal sheets to group
even though they have been completed, they may not take responsibil-
ity for getting the goals sheets signed daily, they may appear to lack
motivation to work on their goals, or their sense of social anxiety or
fear of failure may reduce their compliance with the task. The adult
responsible for monitoring the goal completion (either the teacher or
parent depending on whether the goal is school- or home-related) also
can have difficulties with the task. The teacher or parent may believe
that the goals are inappropriate or are too easy, they may feel that
although children meet a specific behavioral goal they may be feeling
they are getting reinforced for other problem behaviors they displayedthat day, and they may feel that the child’s requests to have the goal
form signed may be occurring at awkward times and may be disruptive
to them.
36
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 48/289
Methods for coping with these problems with goal setting include
sending cards to the children reminding them about their goals during
the middle of the week, setting up a “buddy system” so children can
remind each other about their goals and their goal sheets during the week, setting less challenging and more realistic goals if needed, and
encouraging teachers to comment on their concerns about children’s
general non-goal-related behaviors on the back of the goal sheet.
Common Elements of Every Session
Review of Session Content
In addition to reviewing the weekly goal sheets, it is important to spend
a few minutes at the beginning of each session to review the main points
from the previous session. Begin each session by asking each child to recall
one point from the previous group meeting, using reminders as needed.Because each session in the child component builds on the previous one,
the process of review enhances the opportunity for students to retain the
material being covered from one week to the next. Recapping the primary
message from each group meeting is one way of meeting this objective.
Positive Feedback
Toward the end of each session, group leaders will ask all group mem-
bers to identify one positive thing about themselves and/or one positive
thing about another group member. Try to have the children avoid
complimenting one another on their clothing or other nonbehavioral or
status-oriented matters. Group leaders can model appropriate compli-
ments or positive feedback to assist in this process. Work toward having
group members provide positive feedback to peers on group-related
behaviors or positive examples outside of group that they observed at
school during the week. If time permits, ask each child to identify one
thing that they learned during group. Praise the group for any positive
achievements they may have made during the group session.
37
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 49/289
Prize Box
During group meetings, students can earn points for following group
rules, participating in a positive manner, and achieving their set goals(see Chapter ). In addition, children can earn points for homework
completion (when homework is assigned). These points can either be
saved or traded in for various prizes. At the end of every session, tally
the points each child has earned and award prizes. Children can use
their points immediately or save their points in order to “buy” specific
prizes. If a child wants to purchase a big prize, he or she will have to save
up points. Be sure to keep an ongoing tally of all points earned by eachchild in the group for the duration of the program.
Prior to the first group session, create a prize box menu that lists the
various prizes available. Examples include stickers, erasers, coloring
books, small toys, etc. A sample prize menu is shown in Table ..
38
Table 2.1 Sample Prize Box Menu
Item Cost
Pencils (set of ) points
Pen points
Eraser ( small or large) points
Folder points
Hair clip points
Nail polish points
Lip gloss points
Yo-yo points
Gloves points
Deck of playing cards points
Jewelry points
Nerf ball points
Trading cards points
Softball points
Frisbee points
Wallet pointsFootball/Soccer ball/Basketball points
CD wallet points
Disposable camera points
Clock radio points
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 50/289
Free Time
This is an optional (time-permitting) free play period (– minutes).
Each student who has earned at least one point during group is eligiblefor free time. Group leaders should be aware of any potential problems
that arise between group members during this free play time and use it
as an opportunity to practice “problem solving in action.” Attempt to
have each person involved in the situation discuss the problem and try
to come to a resolution. Try to develop a plan to prevent this type of
problem from occurring again. It is helpful to follow up with these
issues individually and/or at the beginning of the next group session.
The leaders should view this problem-solving opportunity as a process
to be worked on over the course of the entire group. When possible, the
first step would be to have each child discuss the problem individually
with the group leader and then to work toward having the children dis-
cuss the problem situation with each other. During the discussion, lead-
ers should have children accurately identify the problem, talk about
possible misinterpretations, generate several solutions for the problem,
discuss the consequences of these solutions, and determine which solu-tion would best achieve the goal of getting along with the peer.
It is important to remember that each child may be at a diff erent level
in terms of ability to tolerate this form of problem solving. Group lead-
ers should be sensitive to the child’s ability to process and discuss the
conflict and must modulate the problem-solving process accordingly.
This task will be difficult for some of the children to accomplish and
may require shaping by the leaders in order to reach the goal of media-tion. Taking time to process conflicts that occur during the free time
period is very important and may sometimes result in running over the
allotted time for the group meeting. The goal of free time is to end the
meeting on a positive note. Therefore, group leaders should assess if any
child is angry or upset by the situation and, if applicable, determine the
level of this anger before sending the child back to class. If the child is
very angry or upset, the group leaders may decide to retain the child
after the group in order to talk with him or her and reduce the level of
arousal before the child returns to the classroom.
If a child has not earned free time, group leaders should determine how
capable the child is of processing the reason for not earning free time at
the end of group. Group leaders should talk with the child about the
39
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 51/289
rules that were broken, why this happened and how the child can earn
free time the following week. If the child is too angry or upset about not
earning free time and cannot discuss the situation at hand, the leaders
may choose to process the conflict either in an individual meeting priorto the next group or at the beginning of the next session.
Free time can also be used to reinforce the children who exhibit prosocial
behaviors (e.g., sharing, resolving conflict appropriately, etc.).
Homework
Similar to the rationale for implementing the weekly goal sheet,
homework has been shown to be an eff ective exercise that enhances
the student’s ability to retain the information learned from one group
session to the next. Giving students an opportunity to practice what
they learn outside the group setting can help them gain the confidence
needed to eff ectively use these newly learned skills in coping with
diffi
cult situations encountered during day-to-day interactions withpeers. This curriculum recommends the use of “bonus points” to be
given to those students who complete the assigned homework. Bonus
points are given to encourage students to practice what they are learn-
ing and reward them for the eff ort they put forth.
Videotaping Group Meetings
In addition to creating a problem-solving video (Sessions –),
videotaping can be used throughout the course of the curriculum,
especially during role-play activities. Students generally engage readily
to tasks involving work with videotaping. Sometimes students are
given the opportunity to be the camera person, while others generate
scripts and take on acting roles to demonstrate various skills being
presented in the sessions. Once the videotaping segment has beencompleted, giving the students a chance to review their work off ers a
unique opportunity for them to discuss and explore the choices they
made and resulting consequences.
40
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 52/289
When videotape equipment is not available, there are a couple of
alternative activities that may be substituted to meet this objective: ()
have the group members develop and design a problem-solving
pamphlet or cartoon-book that can be copied and viewed by otherstudents and/or parents, () audiotape problem-solving role-plays and
play the tapes back in the group for group discussion of the problem-
solving steps, and () have group members develop a problem-solving
role-play to be performed and presented to another class or to the
parents of the group members.
Throughout the text of the curriculum you will find activities that are
listed as “optional.” These activities have been added to provide group
leaders with a range of choices to select from in meeting the various
objectives in the manual. An example of this might be creating a teacher
newsletter in the session on perspective taking with teachers. This
optional activity involves having the group leaders compile information
to create a newsletter that describes diff erent interviews between mem-
bers of the Coping Power Program and their teachers. This newsletter
then can be copied and handed out to the teachers and students thatparticipated in this activity.
Implementation Issues in the Schools With Teachers
Teachers’ primary roles in the Coping Power Program are to assist with
setting realistic, attainable, and observable behavioral goals for each child,
to monitor their daily progress on these goals, and to provide social rein-
forcement to children for their initial, often fragile, eff orts to implement
new social-cognitive skills (Lochman & Wells, ). To maximize the
likelihood that teachers will be actively supportive of the program and
will successfully monitor students’ behavior daily, we have found it useful
to include school counselors as co-leaders of the children’s groups.
Teachers are less likely to perceive the intervention as being implemented
by “outsiders” if a member of the school sta ff is actively involved in theimplementation of the program. Other procedures that enhance teachers’
positive involvement are the inclusion of periodic “lab” exercises
between children and their teachers on perspective taking and problem
solving, and frequent informal meetings between the group co-leaders
41
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 53/289
and the teachers about the children’s progress. We have also found it to be
useful to assess for “slow responders” about halfway into the intervention
period. If we perceive that some children are beginning to make eff orts to
acquire skills in the group but they are unable to transfer those skills totheir real-world classroom settings, then we provide focused case consul-
tation to the teachers.
Implementation Issues in the Schools With Peers
The primary concern with children’s peers has to do with the tendency of some groups to be reactive in their behavior to each other, to be dis-
ruptive, and to provide deviancy training for each other. To off set these
possibilities, group co-leaders start by enhancing structural control of
children’s behavior in the group as detailed in the following section of
this chapter. Leaders’ careful attention to seating arrangements, provi-
sion of clearly stated expectations for children’s behavior at times of
transitions between activities, and use of direct eye contact and firm
voice tone can be highly useful. The program has evolved over time to
also include more programmatic enhancements designed to create a
positive peer climate in the group. Such enhancements include the use
of positive feedback time at the end of sessions, use of group-based con-
tingencies, use of buddy systems to assist children in remembering their
behavioral goals and the group rules, and use of periodic one-to-one
contacts between intervention sta ff and children. When children do not
respond to these structural and programmatic eff orts, major structuralchanges can be made. These include removing a chronically disruptive
child from the group and instead implementing the program individu-
ally with that child, or dividing the group into more manageable sub-
groups for at least several sessions (Lochman & Wells, ).
When implementing group interventions with angry and aggressive
youth, there is a set of potential obstacles that can interfere with the
optimal functioning of the group and can detract from the eff ectivenessof the intervention (Lochman, Powell, Boxmeyer, Deming, & Young,
). Four primary issues involve children’s reactive behavior in the
group, deviancy training and deviant norms, singletons, and the inclusion
of highly impulsive ADHD youth. These four issues will be briefly
42
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 54/289
described, and then relevant methods for overcoming these obstacles will
be discussed (Lochman & Wells, ).
Reactive Behavior in Groups
Children who are chosen for a CBT group because of their aggressive
behavior with peers can be noncompliant and challenging with adult
group leaders, and they can readily respond to perceived provocations
from other children in the group with flashes of reactive, angry aggres-
sion. Reactive aggressive children have difficulty regulating their angerand arousal, causing their “hot” angry cognitions to interfere with their
information processing. Children may perceive that other group mem-
bers are receiving more favorable treatment from group leaders, they may
feel that they are being blamed for some problem in the group, or they
may feel victimized by a peer’s eff orts to dominate and control others.
Children’s emotional reactions to each other in these situations can be
highly contagious, and can lead to bursts of aversive, conflictual interper-
sonal behavior between group members.
Deviancy Training and Deviant Norms
Group members may reinforce each others’ antisocial behavior and
antisocial attitudes and create potentially iatrogenic eff ects (Dishion &
Andrews, ). The two most prominent explanations for the eff ectthat deviant peer groups have on individuals’ behavior are the influence
of social norms and the influence of deviancy training (Lavallee,
Bierman, Nix, & Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group, ;
Patterson, Dishion, & Yoerger, ). From a social norm perspective,
Wright, Giammarino, and Parad () used the person-group similar-
ity model and found that a high density of aggressive youth in a group
may cause the social norms for aggression to shift to a higher level for
individuals in the group, making aggressive and antisocial behavior
appear to be more socially acceptable.
In addition to being exposed to a number of children with high levels
of aggressive behavior in a deviant peer group, the members of the
43
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 55/289
deviant peer group may directly reinforce each other for their antisocial
attitudes and behaviors. Delinquent adolescent dyads have been found
to provide high rates of positive reinforcement for their partners’
deviant talk, while nondeviant dyads provide reinforcement for eachothers’ normative, nondeviant discussions (Patterson et al., ). This
pattern of reinforcement of rule-breaking talk among deviant dyads
directly a ff ects these youths’ subsequent substance use and delinquency
(Dishion, Eddy, Haas, Li, & Spracklen, ). In a key study that
demonstrated how deviancy training could be a primary mechanism
accounting for the negative eff ect of aggregating antisocial youth,
Patterson and colleagues () found that deviancy training in dyadicinteractions partially mediated the eff ect of boys’ involvement with
deviant peers in 4th grade and their substance use, police arrests, and
number of intercourse partners in th grade.
Dishion and Andrews () found that deviancy training led
young adolescents who were in a group intervention program to have
higher rates of tobacco use and more delinquent behaviors at a one-
year follow-up than did control children. These iatrogenic eff ectsremained even at later three-year follow-ups, especially for youth
with more moderate levels of antisocial behavior at baseline (Poulin,
Dishion, & Burraston, ). The results for social norm explana-
tions for deviant group eff ects are less clear than deviancy training
eff ects (Lavallee et al., ).
These deviant group eff ects can also be apparent in children’s power
struggles with group leaders. If a group member is often involved inchallenging group leaders, and if that child is relatively well accepted by
his or her peers in the group, this can stimulate broad oppositional
power struggles between the group and the leaders, and can reduce chil-
dren’s group involvement and motivation for change.
Singletons
The presence of a child who is clearly diff erent from his or her peers in
the group on important dimensions may contribute to that individual
being ostracized from the group and victimized by peers. Examples of
such “singletons” are having one girl in a group of preadolescent boys,
44
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 56/289
having one minority race child in a group, and having a child with low
cognitive functioning in a group of children with average intellectual
functioning. The singleton child can thus be socially rejected by peers
in the group, and can feel distressed and socially incompetent.
Impulsive ADHD Children
Some children can create serious disruptions in group functioning
because of their ADHD characteristics, which lead them to impulsively
interrupt others and to be in constant physical contact with othersbecause of their uncontrolled hyperactive behaviors. These disruptions
can be distinguished from the reactive aggressive behaviors and the
deviant group eff ects described above because they are not intentional
disruptions or emotionally charged responses to perceived threats.
However, the disruptions caused by ADHD children can seriously
disturb the group’s ability to work on focused tasks. In addition, an
uncontrolled ADHD child can be relatively unable to attend to informa-
tion presented in the group, and thus will be less likely to remember and
incorporate new social cognitive skills.
Ways to Overcome Obstacles With Intervention Groups for Children
Intervention Structure
The two primary ways to address problems with children’s reactive aggres-
sive behavior and with deviancy training eff ects are to closely address cer-
tain structural issues in the intervention and to provide enhanced
behavioral management strategies, as needed. An initial planning issue
has to do with the age of the youth in the group. Iatrogenic deviancy
training eff ects seem to be more evident in adolescent-age groups than inpreadolescent groups. In addition, the inclusion of two group leaders can
increase leaders’ ability to scan children’s behavior continually, and detect
subtle signs of peers’ reinforcement of deviant behaviors.
45
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 57/289
Once the group is formed, it is useful to carefully follow aspects of the
intervention that involve monitoring and providing consequences for
children’s behavior. Thus, in our Coping Power groups we place
emphasis on having clear group rules, starting in the first session, andon providing points for children’s adherence to these rules and for
their positive participation in group sessions. Other program elements
that alert children to how their behavior can lead to consistent conse-
quences include the use of weekly goal setting procedures for each
group member, having group-contingent rewards for the entire group
successfully attaining a certain number of points over several months,
and working with the parents in the parent group sessions on theirability to provide clearer instructions to the children and to provide
consistent consequences for children’s positive and negative behaviors.
Ongoing contact by the group leaders with the teachers can be criti-
cally important in facilitating teachers’ abilities to monitor children’s
social behavior and to provide logical consequences within the
school setting.
Group Behavioral Management Strategies
Minor structural changes in the group can be helpful in providing
stimulus control to prevent behavioral escalation in the group. Such
minor structural changes include changing seating arrangements so
that a group leader is between two particularly reactive children.Group leaders’ use of nonverbal cues (e.g., eye contact; physical
proximity; animated voice tone) can also be an important means for
gaining children’s optimal attention. Eff ective group leaders also are
able to assist children with making smooth transitions from one group
activity to another or from the group back to the class or the waiting
room by verbally preparing them several minutes prior to the change
of activity, and guiding them through the transition. If some group
members are demonstrating high levels of positive involvement in the
group, they can also be used to serve as a “buddy” for reactive peers,
reminding the peer of group rules.
46
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 58/289
Major structural changes can also be implemented in the relatively
rare occasions when these minor structural changes and usual
program structural elements are insufficient to reduce individual
children’s serious problem behaviors in the group. When a centralconcern is intense rivalry between two children, leading them to fre-
quently initiate conflict with each other, or when two children are
actively involved in deviancy training with each other, the group can
be temporarily split into two subgroups. If there were two group
leaders, each leader can then work with a subgroup in a more con-
tained way until group members’ functioning improves and the sub-
groups can be reintegrated. In cases with a severely and chronically disruptive individual in the group, the individual can be seen indi-
vidually rather than in the group for a period of time. If this latter
child begins to demonstrate a stronger therapeutic alliance after sev-
eral individual sessions, then he or she may be carefully reintegrated
into the group.
Adjusting the Concreteness of Group Material
In response to having a “singleton” child with lower cognitive functioning
in the group, group leaders can adapt intervention content to make it more
concrete and less abstractly meta-cognitive. The group leaders can spend
more time in role-playing and hands-on activities rather than in group
discussion. In general, it is easier to make the problem-solving training
more concrete than the attribution-retraining and perspective-taking
sessions in our groups.
Adjustments for ADHD Children
When a highly unregulated hyperactive child is in the group, it is usefulto consult with the parents and to encourage an evaluation for ADHD
and for potential medication management. In group sessions, leaders
typically have to provide more frequent and more individually tailored
monitoring and feedback for the child’s behavior. For example, a group
47
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 59/289
leader can sit next to an ADHD child and use a simple time-sampling
chart to indicate when the child has had good on-task behavior in five-
minute blocks during the session.
Role of Group Leaders
Group leaders serve as coach in a collaborative way with children, but
also must firmly set expectations, monitor children’s behavior in the
group, and provide consequences. Therapists should actively and
frequently socially reinforce positive participation and cooperativebehavior in the group. It is imperative that therapists should prepare
clear transitions between activities and inform children about the agen-
da for the day. When it is possible to have two therapists, they should
prepare together prior to each session for how they will divide up lead-
ership for session activities, and for anticipated problems they might
have with particular children in the group. After the session, it is impor-
tant for the two therapists to have a debriefing period to identify group
process problems that will need to be addressed in the next session.
Training Group Leaders
With regard to therapist skills and attributes (Lochman, Powell,
Jackson, & Czopp, ), intervention sta ff for the Coping Power
Program has consisted of clinicians at the master’s level of professionaltraining (e.g., school counselors, master’s degree in social work) and
psychologists at the early PhD level. These individuals conduct both
the child component within the school or clinic settings and the par-
ent component, generally at the child’s school, at an accessible commu-
nity center, or at a clinic, during a convenient time for parents. An
interest and prior experience in working with children and families
within a cognitive-behavioral framework are essential for a clinician
who chooses to implement this program.
Adequate training and consultation are also critical for successful imple-
mentation of the Coping Power Program (Lochman, Wells, & Murray,
). Clinicians should begin their training by reading the two
48
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 60/289
Facilitator Guides (child group program and parent group program),
which contain session-by-session outlines for all group meeting and the
process of each of the major components of the program. Attendance at
a Coping Power training workshop is the second stage recommendedfor any clinician using this program. Information on Coping Power
training and workshops can be obtained at: www.copingpower.com.
During the workshop, clinicians will become familiar with the back-
ground and rationale of the Coping Power Program and will review
individual sessions to discuss the relevance of the session objectives to
the overall objectives of the program. Once the clinician begins imple-
menting the program, it is essential that he or she have access to anexperienced Coping Power Program interventionist, or another super-
visor with cognitive-behavioral specialty training with children and par-
ents for regular consultation throughout the process.
The clinician’s ability to identify social problems or negative group
process issues and treatment flexibility are essential in implementing the
Coping Power Program. For example, when a child or any group mem-
ber (if using a group format) begins discussing a current social problemthat has recently happened, clinicians should respond by immediately
shifting the agenda for the session to the presented problem, rather than
rigidly sticking to the pre-planned group activities. The clinician can
thus take advantage of the naturally presented opportunity to model
and reinforce problem-solving skills. It is critical that clinicians are
mindful of the overall objectives of the program so that their flexible
responses to children’s problems and to group process issues can still
have a direct impact on the targeted social-cognitive difficulties of
aggressive children.
Basic skills essential to all practicing clinicians should also be noted
because of the impact these skills have on treatment compliance and
discontinuation of treatment (i.e., by caregivers). The clinician’s ability
to build therapeutic alliances with the patient, relevant school person-
nel, and caregivers is an important element of the Coping Power
Program. Failure to build rapport with pertinent people may interfere
with eff ectual implementation of the program. Also, a clinician’s ability
to empathize with the child and the parents of the child is essential to
treating children with externalizing problems.
49
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 61/289
Strict adherence to ethics should be practiced by the clinician, which can
become somewhat complicated with the diff erent therapeutic alliances
that may potentially be created, particularly if the clinician chooses
to use a school-based group format for the sessions (i.e., clinician-child,clinician-teacher, clinician-caregiver). Some potential conflicts that may
arise that should be considered by clinicians from an ethics standpoint
are a parent having concerns of confidentiality and fears about his or her
child attending a group and possibly being “labeled” at school; a parent
(with a strained relationship with a teacher) sharing information in
confidence that the clinician knows would be helpful for the teacher; or
the child sharing information with the clinician during an individualsession that the clinician feels would be useful for group discussion.
Clinicians with multiple, intertwined therapeutic relationships must
inform all parties of the limits of confidentiality and clinicians should
not violate these rules of confidentiality set within the clinician-
group, clinician-child, clinician-school personnel, or clinician-caregiver
relationships. Also, proper documentation of group sessions, individual
sessions, and other related contacts (i.e., individualized education plan
[IEP] meetings) is essential and should be practiced.
50
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 62/289
Coping Power Child Program
Year 1
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 63/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 64/289
53
Chapter 3 Session : Group Structure and Behavioral Goal
Setting Procedure
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Three-Strike System poster
■ Point System poster
■ Ball for group activity
■
Prize box
Outline
■ Discuss group purpose and structure
■ Outline group rules
■ Discuss the Point System and the Three-Strike System
■ Engage children in an activity to build group cohesion
■ Begin discussion of behavioral goal setting
General Purpose and Structure of the Program
Introduce yourself and your co-leader to group members and provide
a brief overview of what the children can expect to experience over the
course of the year (e.g., talk about the general purpose of the group,
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 65/289
54
provide details about length and frequency of meetings, and the
expectations that will be placed on them).
For example, you may say something like the following:
Group meetings will last for approximately hour, and will occur
once each week this year for approximately weeks. You will also
meet with a group in th grade once per week for approximately
weeks. We will not meet on holidays or days on which you will
attend meetings, assemblies, or fi eld trips. One of us will meet with
each of you individually once a month to discuss how things are
going. These individual meetings let us spend time with each of youhelping you to brainstorm about ways that you can make positive
changes in your life. When you are in the group, we hope that you
will feel comfortable talking among yourselves and with us. During
each group you will be provided the opportunity to earn points, all of
which are based on your level of participation. We will talk more
about this later.
The following paragraph is an example of how you or your co-leadermay introduce the purpose of the group:
We will be working with you in this group to improve your ability
to cope with strong feelings and with di ffi cult situations (such as
peer pressure, tough schoolwork, and hard-to-get-along-with
teachers). One of the goals of the group is to provide you with
enough information so that you are better equipped to make a
smooth and successful transition to middle school next year. As part of the group you will learn new ways to handle your anger
and how to solve problems that come up at school, in your neigh-
borhood, and at home. Have any of you heard the term coping
before?
If the answer is yes ask, “What does coping mean to you?” Elicit or shape
a response from group members for the definition of the term coping . For
example, assist children in stating that coping may mean being able tomanage or handle stressful situations when they arise without becoming
too angry or upset. Ask children, “Why do you think this is called the
Coping Power Program?” Elicit or shape a response that would indicate
that they could increase or strengthen their coping skills in this group.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 66/289
Explain that over the course of the next few weeks, the group will work
on helping members recognize when they are angry and develop skills
to handle their angry feelings in a positive way.
We are not going to teach you to stop being angry, but we will teach
you new ways to respond so you can make smarter choices.
Identify situations that make you (leaders) feel angry and convey the
idea that feeling angry is a natural experience that everybody has.
Emphasize that choosing eff ective responses to anger-provoking situa-
tions is what is important, not the emotion itself.
Have group members discuss situations that are difficult for them or
ones that trigger an angry response. Try to have each member talk about
what makes them angry and how they respond. If the child has
difficulty generating answers, ask them to tell you what his or her par-
ent or teacher might suggest. Be sure to record children’s responses for
use in the goal setting section of today’s session.
Group Rules
Next, talk to children about the need for group rules. Ask them for their
ideas of what some of the rules should be. Have one child go to the dry
erase board or flipchart and ask him or her to record the rules that the
group generates. If possible, select a child who does not have writing
difficulties. You may choose to select a particularly quiet child or one
whom you are concerned may not become involved in the group
process. This may facilitate positive group interaction. Leaders can also
have the group members take turns recording the rules that are gener-
ated. Try to make sure that all group members participate in generating
rules. If a child off ers a “strange,” unclear, or silly rule, try to reframe
this into a useful rule. General rules for the group should include:
■ No physical contact
■ No name-calling
■ No swearing
■ Arriving on time
55
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 67/289
■ Having a positive attitude
■ Not interrupting each other
■ Keeping everything private (confidential)
■ Following directions
If these general group rules have not been generated, you and your
co-leader should suggest them. Define the confidentiality rule for
group members as: “What we say in here, stays in here.” Let children
know that this rule applies to both the group leaders and other group
members. Note that the children can talk to their parents aboutgroup discussions but should not talk to other children.
Refer children to the group rules page in the workbook and ask them to
record the rules in the space provided so they can each have their own copy.
Point System
Discuss the point system and describe the procedure for earning points.
Group members can earn one point for:
■ Following rules
■ Positive participation
Group members can earn two points for:
■ Completing homework assignments
Group members can earn up to fi ve points for:
■ Meeting their weekly goal
Create a poster outlining the point system to be displayed in a visible
space at every group meeting.
Following Rules and the Three-Strike System
This system should be used for dealing with problem behavior dis-
played during the meetings or, if appropriate, outside of the meetings
56
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 68/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 69/289
Rewards for Earning Points
After discussing the specifics of the point system, let children know
that they can use their points for certain rewards. There are two thingsthat points can earn. First, children can trade in some of their points
for items from the prize box (see Chapter ). Explain to the group that
you and your co-leader will let each member know his or her point
total at the end of every session. It is important that you also keep
track of each member’s total number of points throughout the dura-
tion of the program. Children can use their points immediately or
save their points in order to “buy” specific prizes. If a child wants topurchase a big prize, he or she will have to save up points. As outlined
in Chapter , prior to today’s meeting you should have created a prize
box menu that lists all the various prizes children can choose from.
You may wish to incorporate children’s suggestions when creating this
menu.
You may also wish to have the students work together to earn a pizza
party or other group reward at the end of the group sessions. Thereward should be based on reaching a certain percentage (e.g., %) of
the total possible points possible for the group (calculated by summing
the total possible points for each individual). This will also encourage
group cohesion and cooperation.
Getting Acquainted/Achieving Group Cohesion
The following activities can help the children get to know one another
and build group cohesion.
Pass the ball: Have group members throw a ball to each other. Ask them
to identify the person (by name) to whom they threw the ball, identify
one thing that is the same about the two of them, and identify one
thing that is diff erent about the two of them.
Group naming task: Have group members decide on a name for their
group (e.g., using a combination of their first initials to form a word).
Have group members generate several alternative names and vote on the
name they would like to use.
58
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 70/289
Goal Setting
Discuss with children the idea of setting goals. Ask them for their
ideas about what goals are and the purpose of setting goals. Elicit a response indicating that a goal is something you work toward meet-
ing. Explain to children that people set goals in order to improve
something in themselves or so that they have a better idea about
what they would like to achieve in the future. A goal provides a per-
son with structure for the future and allows him or her to plan
ahead.
Inform members that each of them will be choosing weekly goals based
on input obtained from their teacher, counselor, or parent. Be sure to
tell them that, at times, more than one person may be working on the
same goal (e.g., being quiet during class), but that meeting this goal
may be easy for one person but difficult for another. Introduce the idea
that the group will be using goal sheets to keep track of their success
with meeting their goals. Refer children to the goal sheets in the work-
book and discuss how points are earned.
You can earn 1 point a day for each day that you meet your goal.
If you meet your goal for the entire week you will earn points.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
59
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 71/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep aneye out for any potential problems that may arise between group mem-
bers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem
solving.
60
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 72/289
61
Chapter 4 Session : Goal Setting – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Paper and pencils
■ Example of one potential group goal that is broken down into smaller
steps
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Illustrate the diff erence between long and short-term goals and the
importance of both types
■ Illustrate the process of personal goal setting
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 73/289
Setting and Realizing Goals
Engage the group members in a general discussion about goal setting.
For example, ask someone to answer the question, “What is a goal?” Youmay review the ideas generated in the previous session. Then, initiate a
more general discussion of goal setting. For example, ask: “What other
kinds of goals have you set for yourself ?” Discuss setting diff erent kinds of
goals, such as finishing homework by a certain time so they can play,
beating their best time in a video game, earning a patch in Girl
Scouts/Boy Scouts, or achieving a certain number of baskets during a
basketball game. Convey to the children that they set goals for them-selves all the time, even though they may not realize it.
Long-Term Goals vs. Short-Term Goals
Elicit a definition of a long-term goal as being one that sets a goal for
the future or something that a person works on for an extended period
of time (e.g., career goal, goal for losing weight by next year, making the
basketball team next season, etc). Short-term goals can be defined in
terms of discrete goals (e.g., staying quiet for minutes), or as steps
that need to happen in order to reach a long-term goal (e.g., passing
each grade in order to get to college). List the long-term and short-term
goals generated by group members on the dry erase board or flipchart.
Creating Long-Term Goals
Inform group members that each of them will develop a long-term goal
during today’s session. They may work on one long-term goal over the
course of the year, or if they meet that goal they may develop a second.
Explain the goal setting process in detail before asking the group members
to complete their long-term goal sheets in the workbook. An eff ective way to do this is to bring an example of a long-term goal to the group. The goal
should be one that requires that an individual meet many short-term goals
in order to meet the long-term goal. Following is an example of a long-
term goal and the associated short-term goals:
62
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 74/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 75/289
each group member to choose one of the steps from their list and use it
as their weekly goal. Instruct children to record this weekly goal on a new
goal sheet in the workbook (see Chapter ).
Help the group members describe their goals in terms of observable
behavior in order to help minimize their use of subjective statements as
goals. For example, “being good in class” is very subjective. This goal
can be behaviorally defined in terms of “not talking back to the
teacher,” “no physical contact with other kids,” and so on. It is impor-
tant to select a goal that is relevant and is not too difficult to preclude
success. Based on student’s performance, it may be necessary to increase
or decrease the level of difficulty of the chosen goals.
Rules for the Goal-Setting Procedure
The following rules should be followed by each child:
■ Each child is responsible for his goal sheet
■ Each child must keep track of his own goal sheet
■ Each child is responsible for getting his goal sheet signed by the
teacher
■ Each child is responsible for returning the goal sheet to group
each week
Remind children of the point system and the fact that points will notbe earned if they do not return their completed goal sheets at the start
of every group meeting. Reiterate the benefits and rewards for meeting
goals (e.g., prize box, pizza party). Problem-solve with group members
about how they can remember to have their goal sheet signed and to
bring it back to the group the following week. Some ideas may include
the following:
■ Putting a sticker on their desk that will serve as a reminder
■ Asking each other to remind one another
■ Keeping their workbooks in their backpacks at all times
64
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 76/289
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-
leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing aboutthemselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep an
eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group mem-
bers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem
solving.
65
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 77/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 78/289
67
Chapter 5 Session : Goal Setting – Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets and set goals for coming week
■ Reinforce goal setting as an ongoing process
■ Review progress in achieving goals
■ Identify barriers to goals and how to overcome them
■ Introduce the “buddy system”
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from theprevious week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 79/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets and Set Goals for Coming Week
Engage the students in a discussion about goal setting. Review the goal
that had been set the previous week. Ask children, “What goal did eachof you set for yourself for the classroom? How did you do with meeting this
goal? What made it easy/di ffi cult to reach the goal you set for yourself? How
about other goals you have set in the past?”
Remember to award points to children who successfully achieved their
goal.
After reviewing progress in goal setting, work with the group to set next week’s goals. If some children had difficulty in achieving their goals, their
goals may be broken down into smaller, more manageable steps. If some
children found their goals easy to meet, assess the need for setting more
challenging goals. Share with children the idea that goal setting is a process.
Reinforce Understanding of the Process of Goal Setting
Ask group members how they know if they have met a goal they set for
themselves. You may use the following questions.
■ How do you feel if you met your goal?
■ How do you feel if you did not meet your goal?
■ What do you do if you have met your goal?
Elicit the types of rewards or reinforcements that each student uses and
determine whether they make attempts to change or increase the goals
they have set by asking, “What do you do if you do not meet your goal?”
Elicit a response that indicates goal setting is a process that involves eval-
uating goals that have been set for oneself, rewarding the self if goal was
met, reevaluating the goals that have not been met, determining ways to
meet the goal the next time you try, and potentially decreasing the crite-ria for meeting the goal or breaking the goal down into smaller, more
achievable steps.
You may wish to further illustrate the process of goal setting by describ-
ing to the group how you worked your way to your current profession.
68
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 80/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 81/289
of the goal they are working on in group and to help them overcome any
potential barriers.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
70
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 82/289
71
Chapter 6 Session : Organizational and Study Skills
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Stopwatch
■ Sets of words on diff erent colors of paper
■ Index cards listing positive and negative study skills
■ Book bags (students bring their own to group)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Improve academic organization skills
■ Review study skills for school and homework skills at home
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 83/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember,goals will vary depending on individual needs. The length of time a
child may keep his or her goal may vary as well. Some students may
need to spend several weeks or even months working on the same goal
while other students will change goals more readily.
Remember to award points to children who successfully achieved
their goal.
Strategies for Achieving School Success
Introduce the topic for today by discussing the transition to a new grade
and the concomitant increase in homework and study demands that
teachers may make on students. You may use the following sample
dialogue.
Since this is the beginning of the school year, we wanted to spend
some time talking about the need to set goals for ourselves this year.
As you are entering this new grade, you may have noticed that teach-
ers are asking you to do more work or asking you to assume more
responsibility in terms of completing assignments or homework on
your own. This means that you may need to develop new skills in
order to meet these new demands. One of the goals we would like for
all of you to set is to do as well as you can in school this year. What
do you think is the most important skill for doing well in school?
Shape/elicit a response that indicates the importance of organizational
skills. Also point out at this stage that sometimes problems with teachers
72
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 84/289
arise when students do not always complete their homework, or do not
keep up with the assignments they are asked to do. Inform group mem-
bers that they may have better relationships with their teachers if they
start off by completing all work. Also talk with group members about theidea that sometimes kids feel frustrated with their schoolwork, which
makes them feel more irritable at school and then more likely to feel
angry with others or get into fights at school. Indicate that taking greater
responsibility in terms of completing assignments and doing schoolwork
can decrease frustration and therefore help kids to feel less angry in
general at school.
Book Bag Organization Activity
Students should have arranged to have their book bags brought to
today’s session. Inform members that you are going to have a contest to
see who can organize their book bag the best. You may use the follow-
ing sample dialogue:
Kids who organize their book bags will know where all of their fold-
ers and books are, and they can easily fi nd their assignment books
and sheets. You know that we asked you to bring your book bags to
group today. The fi rst thing we want to do is to see who can fi nd
their assignment sheet (or math/English notebook, pencil, ruler,
etc.—the particular item to have members look for can vary, just
make sure that all the students will have one of what you ask them to fi nd) the fastest. We will time you to see how quickly you are able to
fi nd this item. Ready? Go!
Following this exercise, announce how long it took for the quickest
person to find the item and then say: “We want to play a game with
your bags and see who can organize their book bag the best. We will ask
each of you to tell us how you organized your bag, starting with the per-
son who fi nished fi rst.” Use the stopwatch to time the children as they organize their book bags. Ask the winner to explain how he organized
his bag. Let the children know that there are probably several “best”
ways to organize their book bags, and each child needs to pick the way
that works best for him. Give the students awards or stickers for
73
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 85/289
improved book bags. Once all the students have organized their bags,
ask them to once again find their assignment sheet (or whatever item
you asked them to look for earlier). Use the stopwatch once more to
time the students. Announce how long it took for the first person tofind the particular item. Now that their book bags are organized, the
children should find that locating the item takes less time than it did
earlier.
Next, ask the children whether they believe it is important to do home-
work and if so, why? You can tie this discussion into goal setting and
long-term goals. Focus on the idea that it is more likely that children
will keep their bags organized and will do their homework if they
believe it is important.
Book Bag Check Activity
If not all the students have brought their book bags, you can ask one
child who does have a bag to go through it and tell the other groupmembers how the bag is organized. Make the point that there are many
diff erent ways to organize book bags, but the idea is to have some
organization so that children can find the materials they need. After this
discussion, engage students in the next activity.
Organizational Skills Activity
After engaging students in one of the previous book bag activities, have
them play a group game designed to help them learn more eff ective
organizational skills. In order to facilitate this activity, you will need a
set of papers for each child to organize in some manner. Each piece of
paper can contain one of the following words (or any other combina-
tion of words):
cat car apple football dog plane orange baseball
bike pear soccer elephant boat lemon basketball bear
These words should be presented on diff erent colors of paper, with each
word within a certain category being on a diff erent color of paper.
74
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 86/289
Provide each child with a set of these words (make sure to scramble the
words up so they are not in order) and off er the following instructions:
We are giving each of you some words listed on these papers. What we
want you to do is to take a few minutes and put these pieces of paper
into some kind of order.
Allow the children to organize the papers in any way they want (they can
sort them by color of paper, alphabetical order of words, by category,
etc.). After all children have organized their papers, let them know that
you are going to ask each of them to find a particular word and that you
will time them to see how long it takes. Have each group member try tofind one of the words from the list and use the stopwatch to time them.
After all the students have had an opportunity to find a word, determine
who was the quickest and ask the child to talk about how he organized
the papers so that he was able to find the word so quickly. Ask all group
members to talk about how they organized the words and whether their
strategy was useful or not when they went to find the word during the
game.
Review Study Skills for Home and School
Explain to the group that part of doing well in school is learning how
to study and how to be organized so that schoolwork is easier. There are
some things that kids can do at school that will help them to do better
in their classes, while there are diff erent things that kids can do at hometo do better on their homework.
Prior to the group session you should have created a set of index cards
listing positive and negative study skills. Each index card should list
either a positive (e.g., study in a quiet place, take notes in class, double
check your answers, ask questions in class, focus while reading, etc.) or
negative (e.g., do homework in the living room while watching TV,
answer the phone while you’re studying, do your homework in a rushin the morning before school, etc.) study habit or skill.
Provide the group with the stack of cards and ask them to decide
whether each idea would be useful for studying or not, and have them
75
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 87/289
sort the ideas into two piles. Ask them to suggest any additional skills
that have not been provided. Next, go through the useful skill pile and
ask group members to decide why/how each skill or habit would help
them learn more eff ectively.
Optional Role-Play
An optional exercise you can conduct is a leader-modeled role-play. In
this exercise, either you or your co-leader portrays a teacher assigning
homework. The “teacher” should say, “Class, next month you need to turnin a report on the reading from this book.” Then, ask group members
what the assignment is, and whether the “teacher” provided enough
information for the students to know exactly what the assignment was
or if the students in the class need more information. Once members
have identified that there are some additional pieces of information to
attain (i.e., how long should the report be, what day of the month is it
due, how much reading is required, is the report based on the whole
book or just a couple chapters, etc.), ask children how they would go
about gathering this information. The group can then role-play this sit-
uation once more with the leader playing the role of the teacher repeat-
ing the same instruction while group members ask for the additional
information.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-
leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
76
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 88/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask the children to review the Study Skills at School handout in the
workbook.
✎ Have each student complete and return the Homework Contract in
the workbook (signed by both the student and parent) to the next
group session. Remind group members that they can earn extra points
for returning their homework. The homework handout can be
reviewed with children in an individual session so that each child has
an individualized plan for themselves in terms of homework
achievement.
77
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 89/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 90/289
79
Chapter 7 Session : Awareness of Feelings and Physiological
Arousal Related to Anger – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Cartoon faces, feelings poster, or photos from a magazine depicting
diff erent emotional states
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify the behavioral, cognitive, and physiological components of
various emotional states
■ Identify situational triggers for various emotional states
■ Recognize that expression of feelings may be diff icult
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 91/289
Also check that children signed, and had their parents sign, the Homework
Contract in the workbook. Remember to award points for doing home-
work.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that the children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember
to award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Identification of Different Feeling States
You have the option of using either the cartoon faces from the work-
book, or pictures of real faces from magazines to explain the concept of
feeling states. You may also wish to create a feelings poster to display
during today’s session by gluing the magazine pictures to a large piece
of poster board.
Ask children how they can tell when they or someone else is happy or
sad or nervous or scared or angry. The goal of this exercise is for group
members to learn to identify diff erent physiological and physical cues of
emotion (including facial expression, body posture, tone of voice, and
internal body cues) and to understand that experiencing any feeling is
acceptable. Emphasize that it is the behaviors that are associated with
some emotions that need to be changed.
Refer children to the cartoon faces in their workbooks (or direct their
attention to the feelings poster or magazine photos) and ask them to
discuss and identify the various feelings depicted. Ask each child to
identify how they are feeling at this time. Remember to convey the atti-
tude that all feelings are acceptable but that some behaviors are not.
Group Leader Tip:
■ Periodically during this session, you and your co-leader can refer to the
cartoon faces (or feelings poster or magazine photos) and identify how
you are feeling at that point, using di ff erent feelings to model
identi fi cation of various feeling states (i.e., frustration, hopeful,
satis fi ed) and then ask each child to identify how they are feeling at
80
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 92/289
that point. Convey to children that our feelings change periodically
and it may be useful to monitor our feelings at di ff erent times and to
become more aware of what we are feeling.
Next, conduct an exercise in which group members identify what feel-
ing is being expressed nonverbally by others in the group. This will allow
children to integrate the diff erent cues of a ff ect states noted earlier.
There are several exercise options. For each, have the child act out the
feeling nonverbally, while the other group members try to decide the
feeling being portrayed. Ask other members, “What cues did you use?”
Options for selecting feelings to portray include:
■ Option : Have group members identify various feeling states,
write these down on pieces of paper, and place them in a hat or
box for selection.
■ Option : Place the magazine pictures depicting diff erent faces and
feelings in a hat or box for selection.
■ Option : Use diff erent pictures of feeling states or a diff erent set
of feeling cards and have children choose one to enact.
■ Option : Use a “feeling-cube,” which depicts diff erent feeling
states. Have each child roll the cube and enact the feeling that
comes up on the cube.
Identification of Emotional Triggers
Further the discussion of feeling states by discussing “triggers” that lead
to diff erent emotions. Ask the group to tell you some things that make
them happy. Allow one or more children to respond. Ask the group to
tell you some things that make them scared. Again, allow one or more
children to respond. Explain that the things that happen that lead to a
person feeling an emotion are called triggers. Ask the children if they
have ever heard of the term. Explain that a trigger is something that
happens to us or around us that sets off an emotion inside of us. Do
NOT use a gun analogy or anything else related to violence when
explaining this term.
81
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 93/289
Next, discuss how we realize that we are experiencing an emotion. Write
the following on the dry erase board or flipchart:
EMOTION HAPPY
“What people can see” “What you feel inside “The thoughts inside
your body” your head”
Ask group members to provide you with examples of each category for
“emotion happy.” Repeat the process for “emotion scared.” Write
the examples on the dry erase board or flipchart.
The next section focuses solely on anger; erase or remove the informa-tion related to happy and scared before moving on.
Direct children’s attention to the “What people can see” column on the
flipchart and ask them to list behaviors people show when they are angry.
Obvious behaviors include shouting, jumping up and down, and hitting.
Less obvious behaviors include talking calmly about the problem, becom-
ing silent, and withdrawing from others. Inform the group that many of
these behaviors can lead to problems in relationships because they do nothelp deal with the problem at hand. The only response mentioned in the
aforementioned list that is positive (i.e., solution-focused) is “talking
calmly about the problem” (although other eff ective responses can be dis-
cussed as they come up). The remaining behaviors on the list are not gen-
erally eff ective ways of handling anger. After this discussion, ask each
child to talk about the behavior that they are most likely to show when
they are angry: “What behaviors do each of you show when you are angry?”
Move to the column titled, “What you feel inside your body” and ask
children to name one thing they each feel inside their body when they are
angry. Try to elicit at least one response from each group member, and
more if possible. Examples of internal experiences include but are not
limited to tightened muscles, faster heart rate, harder breathing, feeling
hot, and feeling sick to the stomach. You can then discuss how to use a
physiological cue as a signal for impending anger, and how to use this sig-
nal as a way to help them control their response.
Then, move to the “The thoughts inside your head” column and ask
children to list some of the thoughts they have when they are feeling
angry. Try to elicit at least one response from each group member and
82
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 94/289
more if possible. Examples of thoughts include but are not limited to,
“I just want to punch that guy,” “I’ll get you back for that,” “Just wait.
. . . just wait. . . . You’ll see who is tougher now,” or “I’m just not going
to do anything that you say. See how you like that.” You can then dis-cuss how to use automatic thoughts as a signal for anger, and how to use
this signal as a way to help children control their responses.
Discuss Difficulty Expressing Feelings and Normalize Feelings
Review with children the cues that can be used to decide how they orother people are feeling. Discuss the idea that some feelings may be
diff icult to express and that you cannot always tell what other people
are feeling because they may be concealing their true emotions. Open
the discussion with one of the following statements/questions and
allow the meeting to naturally progress, taking initiative as needed:
■ Can you always tell what someone is feeling by how they look or what
they do?
■ Are you always able to express your feelings?
■ Are there some feelings that are easier for you to express than others?
■ Sometimes you cannot tell how someone else is feeling or how you are
feeling.
If you wish, you may direct children to the Feelings Bottle worksheet
in their workbooks and ask them each to list the various feelings they
experience in the spaces provided. Then ask each member to circle the
feelings that are easy for him or her to express, and to put a square
around the feelings that are harder to express.
Ask group members to identify the situations that cause them to feel
certain emotions (angry, sad, happy, nervous, excited, afraid, etc.).
Convey the idea that everyone experiences all feelings at diff erent times
and it is acceptable to feel all the diff erent feelings. Restate that all
feelings are acceptable, but some behaviors are not.
Use the situations identified by the group, or other relevant situations (e.g.,
you are about to ride a roller coaster, your mother becomes sick, your
83
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 95/289
goldfish dies, you have a big test and you want to do well on it, etc.) to
conduct role-plays with the group. Have children role-play brief depictions
of the diff erent situations as leading to various feelings and have them
identify how they would be feeling if they were really experiencing thatsituation. Be sure to normalize the experience of diff erent emotions.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind children to bring their signed goal sheets to next
week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselvesand/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between groupmembers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
84
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 96/289
85
Chapter 8 Session : Awareness of Feelings and
Physiological Arousal Related to Anger – Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Thermometer model
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify various cues of anger
■ Identify diff erent levels of anger
■ Identify triggers for diff erent levels of anger and ways to cope
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 97/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Identify Physiological Cues of Anger/Other Feelings
Using the feelings poster (or the cartoon faces in the workbook) from
the previous week, begin today’s meeting by asking children to identify
one situation that occurred in the past week which resulted in themfeeling sad, afraid, or angry.
We wanted to have each of you share a situation from the past week
that made you feel sad, afraid, or angry. What was something that
happened to each of you to cause you to experience one of these
feelings?
Reinforce the idea that it is acceptable to feel all diff erent feelings
including anger, but it is what we do when angry that can be prob-
lematic. Ask the group: “Do you think anger goes away if you ignore it?”
Review with the group the physiological cues of anger. Act like you are
angry (e.g., stamp your feet, grimace, ball your hands into fists, etc.)
and describe what you are feeling inside. Ask children to identify your
physiological reactions. Explain that people have diff erent bodily reac-
tions when they experience strong feelings, particularly anger. “How
does your body feel when you become angry? What is the fi rst thing you
notice in your body when you are becoming angry?” Explain to the group
that these physical cues are signals that they are becoming angry and
may need to stop and think how to handle the situation.
Identify Various Levels of Anger
Facilitate a discussion of various levels of emotions. First, discuss the
feeling of being happy. Refer children to the list of happy words in the
86
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 98/289
workbook. The list includes the following words that depict varying lev-
els of happiness:
Joyful Cheerful Ecstatic
Exhilarated Delighted Thrilled
Glad Jolly Excited
Pleased Gleeful Overjoyed
Next, direct children to the list of sad words in the workbook. The list
includes the following words that depict varying levels of sadness:
Disappointed Depressed Sorrowful
Unhappy Hopeless Joyless
Crushed Down Blue
Defeated Distraught
Lastly, present children with a list of angry words (also available in the
workbook). This list includes the following words that depict varying
levels of anger:
Outraged Enraged Bothered
Annoyed Fuming Flustered
Upset Furious Irritated
Mad Frustrated
Next, facilitate a discussion of the physiological reactions at diff erent
levels of being angry. Present children with a picture of a thermometer
or create one using a large piece of poster board and have them follow
along using the picture of a thermometer in their workbooks. “Is every-
body familiar with how a thermometer works?” Be sure to explain the con-
cept or have a child describe how a thermometer works when measuring
temperature. Once the concept is clear, ask the group if someone wouldbe willing to explain how this concept can be applied to the
measurement of anger. Ask children where they may place some of the
various words describing anger on the Anger Emotion Thermometer in
the workbook.
87
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 99/289
Review all signals of anger: behavioral, emotional, physical, cognitive; you
can have children identify each of the signals at the various levels/degrees
of anger discussed earlier. Also review salient triggers for anger. Ask chil-
dren, “What do others do that makes you angry?” You and your co-leadercan point out commonalities in triggers. Ask the group, “What do you do
that makes other people angry?” Make sure group members recognize the
reciprocity in relationships. Use the thermometer and ask group members
to identify the triggers for each degree/level of anger.
Coping With Anger
Next, introduce the idea of coping with anger and have group members
discuss ways to cope at each level of anger. Use the following questions
to guide the discussion:
■ What do you do to cope with anger when you are a little bit angry?
■ What coping strategies do you use when you are very angry?
■ How do the ways you cope di ff er depending on how angry you are?
■ Is it easier to cope with anger when you are just a little bit angry or
very angry? Why?
The group will talk more specifically about coping strategies of anger at
next week’s session.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
88
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 100/289
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-
leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing aboutthemselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask children to record their daily anger feelings for one week using the Anger Thermometer Record Form #1 in the workbook. Instruct chil-
dren to check off each type of anger they experience each day and to
identify the general trigger for this feeling. It is helpful to have a list of
possible triggers available for children to refer to. This list should
include being teased/scolded by peers, not being able to do what one
wants, being reprimanded by the teacher, being reprimanded by a par-
ent, and not doing well in school, among others.
89
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 101/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 102/289
91
Chapter 9 Session : Anger Coping and Self-Control
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Deck of playing cards
■ Dominoes
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Review diff erent methods of coping with anger
■ Practice using anger coping/self-control
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 103/289
You will review their Anger Thermometer Record Forms during the
review of ways to cope with anger.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Review Concepts of Anger Coping or Self-Control
Introduce the idea of coping with anger and have group members discuss
ways to cope at each level of anger. Remind children, “Over the last two
weeks, we have talked about experiencing di ff erent levels of emotions. Sometimes
we feel very, very angry (high on the emotion thermometer) and sometimes we
feel just a little bit angry (low on the emotion thermometer). Does everyone
remember this from last week?” Allow time for discussion before reviewing
the thermometer homework assignment from the previous session.
Remember to award two points to children who completed the homework.
Ways of Coping With Anger
Next, the group will talk about diff erent ways to cope with anger. You
may say something like the following to facilitate discussion:
Today, we are going to talk about how we handle emotions and, in par-
ticular, how we handle the feeling of anger. I want each of you to tell the
group what you do to cope with anger when you are a little bit angry.
Ask each group member to volunteer a coping strategy. Then ask each
group member, “What do each of you do when you are very angry?” Allow
time for discussion, including the way that the methods are similar or
diff erent. Possible strategies include but are not limited to the following:
■ Walking away from a provocative peer
■ Reminding oneself that it is not worth getting in trouble
■ Trying to compromise with a parent
92
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 104/289
■ Ignoring something that makes you angry
■ Telling an adult that somebody or something is bothering you
■ Talking to the person who is making you feel angry
It is important to convey to the group that our ability to cope with
emotions is diff erent depending on the intensity of the emotion. Have
the group members identify various ways to express diff erent feelings.
For example, expression of feelings can occur via writing, creating art,
talking to the person with whom you are angry, talking to another
person, playing sports or engaging in physical activity, and listening to
music, among others.
Practice Using Anger Coping or Self-Control
This portion of today’s session introduces the idea of coping with feel-
ings of anger that are triggered by teasing. Many children indicate that
teasing is one of the more diffi
cult situations with which to cope, and itis believed that teaching children eff ective strategies for coping with teas-
ing will allow them to develop better control of their reactions to this
common event. The series of activities that are carried out over the next
four sessions are believed to be eff ective because they provide gradual
exposure to teasing, which can arouse emotion in the children participat-
ing. Using self-control or anger coping in this more naturalistic situation
then increases the likelihood that the skill being taught will generalize to
the classroom or other outside situations. However, be sensitive to the
needs of your children and intervene to assist them as needed.
Self-Control Memory Game
Use the deck of cards to play a game in which children practice using
some of the coping strategies just discussed. You may introduce thegame as follows:
We are going to play a memory game during which you have to prac-
tice self-control. I will show one person cards, and this person will
try to remember as many numbers on the cards as they can, while the
93
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 105/289
rest of the group members say things to distract him or her (such as
making teasing comments toward the person engaged in the task).
There are a couple of important rules for this game:
( ) You cannot curse;
( ) You cannot make racial comments; and
( ) You cannot touch the person who is practicing self-control.
The person who is practicing self-control should try as hard as he or she
can to focus on the cards and to not pay attention to the teasing by others.
We are going to keep track of your scores to see who remembers the most.
Pick diff erent number cards and arrange a fan so that all card numbers
are visible. Choose one group member at a time to play this game and
expose the cards to the group member for seconds. This group mem-
ber will have to utilize self-control while the other group members make
teasing remarks (you and your co-leader should not be involved in the teas-
ing). The group member trying to remember the numbers may talk aloud.
After
seconds have elapsed, give the child memorizing the numbers a piece of paper and a pen to write down as many numbers as he or she can
remember (suits are not important). Repeat this procedure for each group
member and keep track of the results to tell the group members at the end.
After the game is over, discuss it with the group using the following
sample questions:
■ Was it hard to concentrate on the numbers?
■ How did you keep your attention focused?
■ How did you maintain your self-control?
■ Did you start to feel angry?
■ Did that hurt your concentration?
■ Did the winner become angry?
The point to convey is that all the group members were probably able to
utilize self-control by ignoring the others and their teasing remarks and
concentrating on the cards. Ask children, “What can you do if you are in the
classroom and someone starts teasing you or acting up?” The answer is that the
94
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 106/289
children should call on the skills that they utilized during this game and
use them in real life. Those children who had difficulty blocking out their
peers will need to be encouraged to work on the skill of ignoring.
Self-Control Dominoes Game
Play a second self-control game using dominoes. Indicate that the same
rules apply to this game. Introduce the game as follows:
We are going to play a di ff erent self-control game. This time, you
each have to build a tower of dominoes. We will give you seconds
to build your tower as high as possible, using one hand, while the
other group members are teasing you. Remember to focus on the
dominoes and ignore what the other children are saying.
Have each member take a turn at building the tower. Keep track of the
results to tell the group members at the end. Discuss this activity in a
similar manner as was done for the memory card game. Emphasize
group members’ ability to ignore peer teasing and how this skill can be
practiced in the classroom.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet inthe workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-
leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
95
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 107/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask children to continue recording their daily anger feelings using the
Anger Thermometer Record Form # in the workbook. This version of
the form provides a space for children to record the way in which they
coped with their anger. Instruct children to fill out this section and bring
the completed form to next week’s session.
96
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 108/289
97
Chapter 10 Session : Using Self-Statements
for Anger Coping – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Puppets – enough so that each child and group leader can have one of
their own
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce concept of self-instruction
■ Use puppets to practice self-instruction and distraction as coping skills
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 109/289
Also check that children completed their Anger Thermometer Record
Forms. Children who returned homework should receive two points for
completing the assignment. If the children indicated that they were able
to cope with their anger, ask what strategies they used to make this hap-pen. Ask group members to identify the thoughts that they experienced
with each level of anger.
■ What did you say to yourself when you were feeling angry or
irritated?
■ Did these thoughts make you feel angrier than you did before?
■ Did these thoughts help you to calm down?
■ Did these thoughts help you to solve the problem?
Have group members identify self-statements that would be eff ective
at each level of anger. Write these coping self-statements next to the
appropriate degree/level on the thermometer. Convey the idea that it
is easier to use coping statements and to think about better ways to
cope with the situation at the lower levels of anger than at higherlevels.
Introduce Self-Talk or Self-Statements
Present children with examples of diff erent types of self-statements
people may use when they are angry. For example, act like you are
angry at someone else and say, “This guy is a jerk and always out to
get me!” “I can’t believe he did that. I hate him!” Ask children, “Do
you say these kinds of things to yourself when you are angry? Do these self-
statements help you control your anger and solve the problem?” Then,
role-play using coping self-statements by saying, “I am not sure why
he did that. I don’t care what he thinks. I can keep my cool.” Ask
group members whether they think coping statements like these can
help control anger or solve problems.
Discuss incidents during the past week when group members became
angry at school. As children talk about their incidents, ask follow-up
questions such as, “What did you say to yourself? Did these thoughts
help you cope with your anger? What things could you have said that
98
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 110/289
would have made you less angry?” If possible, you may wish to
audiotape or videotape each group member saying several coping
self-statements in response to an anger-provoking situation (to pro-
vide them with additional practice using anger-reducing self-state-ments or to convey to parents one of the ideas being presented to
their child during the parent group). You can use situations that
involve a failed attempt at group entry or peer teasing, having the
children verbalize the self-statements they would use in this situation
to avoid becoming angry.
Practice Using Self-Statements
Remind children of the self-control games they played last week (mem-
ory card game and dominoes).
During the last meeting we played two games that involved each of
you practicing using coping statements. The goal was for each of you
to focus your attention on the task (either memorizing the numbers on a series of cards or building a tower of dominoes with one
hand). The winners were the person who remembered the most cards
or built the highest tower. We agreed that _____ and _____
(name(s) of the children who won the two games) won because they
were really good at blocking out the things that people were saying
and were able to focus on something else—the cards or the dominoes.
This is what we want all of you to be able to do when people are
teasing you or making you angry.
Wait for responses from the group and respond accordingly. Then, let
children know that today the group will play another self-control game.
This time the children will use puppets.
Self-Control Puppet Game
Hand out puppets to the children in the group. Make sure each child gets
one and that there is one left for either you or your co-leader to use. You
will use your puppet to interact with the children’s puppets. Explain to
99
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 111/289
the group that their puppets should tease your puppet by saying mean or
hurtful things. Make sure that each child takes a turn and that all puppets
do not “talk” at once (i.e., one puppet says something, then another, then
another; keep going until it seems appropriate to stop). Remind childrenthat the same rules for last week’s games apply today. There is no cursing
or making racial comments. Also, children are not allowed to touch other
group members or their puppets, and they should direct their comments
at your puppet, not at you.
During this exercise, model self-talk and other coping skills that will
enhance anger coping, such as:
■ I can tell I am getting mad and I want to be careful not to get too
angry and lose my temper.
■ I think I will ask them to stop and see if that works.
■ They are just trying to make me mad so that I will say something
back and get into trouble.
■
It is not worth getting mad about—they do not know what they are talking about anyway.
■ I like my _____ (hair, clothes, shoes), so why should I get mad if they
are saying something about it?
Attempt to use techniques that would be applicable for diff erent degrees
of anger. Make your statements out loud but make sure the group mem-
bers understand that self-talk occurs inside your head. In a real life
situation you would not be mumbling coping statements under your
breath or saying them out loud.
After modeling self-talk, let children know that they are going to use the
puppets to practice using coping statements themselves. Introduce the
activity as follows:
Now, we are going to have each of you practice using coping state-
ments. We want each of you to use your puppet to make coping state-ments when reacting to teasing from other puppets—this means that
we want to hear you say the coping statements out loud. We know
that in real life you would say them to yourself inside your head but,
for today, we want to hear you say them out loud.
100
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 112/289
Allow – seconds per child for the teasing of their puppet by other
group members’ puppets. Allow ample space between group members
to discourage physical provocation. You and your co-leader should not
engage in the teasing exercise but should focus on maintaining orderand assisting the group members in coping eff ectively. After each turn,
ask one or more of the following questions:
■ What was the puppet thinking or saying to himself?
■ What level of anger did the puppet experience during the teasing?
■ What skills did the puppet use to maintain control over his anger?
■ Did the puppet use di ff erent coping statements for di ff erent levels of
anger?
■ What other feelings did the puppet experience?
Be sure to provide positive feedback to children regarding their use of
coping skills and reinforce the use of distraction techniques (e.g., focus-
ing their attention on an object in the room or thinking about a fun
game that they could play later that day). You may also use the feelings
poster from Session and/or the thermometer model from Session to
monitor feeling states.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
101
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 113/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
102
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 114/289
103
Chapter 11 Session : Using Self-Statements for Anger
Coping – Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Continue self-instruction and distraction training
■ Encourage generalization of this skill to the classroom
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from theprevious week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 115/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Continue Practice of Coping Self-Statements
Review the self-control game with puppets from the previous group
session. Refer children to the list of coping statements in the workbook
and then introduce today’s self-control game.
Today we are going to play the self-control game, but this time, we
are going to let each of you receive the teasing and practice using self-
control. The person being teased will stand in the middle of the
group. To help each of you be prepared with coping statements, let’s
take a few minutes to review the coping statements in your work-
books. During this review time, I want you to choose three that you
will use for this exercise. We hope that you will use more of them inthe future, but for today you should practice using at least three.
It is useful to arrange the chairs in a circle, having the child being
teased stand in the middle of the circle and the children doing the
teasing stand outside the circle of chairs. Before beginning the exer-
cise, instruct the child about to be teased to tell the group which cop-
ing self-statements he or she is going to use. Make sure each child in
the group takes a turn receiving the teasing comments. If a child ishaving diff iculty with this task, you can have that child tell the other
group members which comments are permissible (provide the other
children with a script). You may also have other group members take
turns delivering the teasing, rather than having all the children teas-
ing at one time. A third possibility would be to have one of the group
leaders stand in the middle with the child being teased to verbalize
coping self-statements as a modeling and supportive technique for
the child. Once the exercise has been completed, ask each child the
following:
■ How did you feel?
■ What were you thinking or saying to yourself ?
104
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 116/289
■ Were you able to use the coping self-statements?
■ How did this help you with self-control?
■ Did you use other distraction techniques?
Review with the group how this exercise can help them with real teas-
ing in the classroom. Ask children, “What can you do if someone teases
you in the classroom? What kinds of coping self-statements will help you
feel less angry?”
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
105
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 117/289
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask children to continue recording their daily anger feelings using the
Anger Thermometer Record Form # in the workbook. This version
of the form provides a space for children to record the coping state-
ments they used to deal with their anger.
✎ Encourage children to use coping statements over the course of each
day and to look to the list in the workbook to find statements that are
useful for them. A long-term goal is to have these statements memo-
rized; in the short term, children may choose to tape a small piece of
paper with one or more of the statements to their desks.
106
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 118/289
107
Chapter 12 Session : Using Self-Statements
for Anger Coping – Part III
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Video recorder (optional)
■ Videotape from previous session depicting self-control exercise (if one
was made)
■ Videotape player and television for viewing previous session’s video
(optional)
■ Large drawing of a thermometer that can be placed on the floor and
used to indicate low, medium, and high in relation to feelings of anger
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Review self-instruction
■ Strengthen memory for coping statements
■ Practice self-control
■ Set new weekly goals
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 119/289
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
You will review their completed Anger Thermometer Record Forms
during the review of self-instruction and coping statements.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Review Self-Instruction and Real Life Application of Coping Statements
Review the concept of self-talk and the activities that were used to con-
vey this concept (e.g., card memory game, dominoes, and puppet teas-
ing). Ask questions such as:
■ Do you remember what those games involved?
■ What were some of the things that people said to themselves to keep
from being angry when they were teased?
■ Are there any other things you can say to yourself that would help you
to stay calm and to stay in control of your behavior (e.g., not fi ght)
when angry?
Review children’s completed Anger Thermometer Record Forms from
last week and their use of coping self-statements. Use positive reinforce-
ment strategies to encourage the children to continue practicing their
coping statements outside of group. To encourage a more in-depthunderstanding of why it is important to use coping statements, ask
questions such as:
■ What did you say to yourself when you fi rst started to notice you were
getting angry?
108
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 120/289
■ Did these thoughts help you cope with your anger? How?
■ Did you say anything to yourself that made you become
angrier?
■ What could you have said to yourself that would have made you
less angry?
■ Why do you think it is important to be aware of the things we tell
ourselves in problem situations?
Remember to award two points to children who completed the home-
work. Provide positive reinforcement to those group members whocompleted the assignment.
If possible, you may wish to audiotape or videotape each group
member saying several coping self-statements in response to an anger-
provoking situation. This provides additional practice using anger-
reducing self-statements and can be used in parent groups to convey to
parents one of the ideas being presented to their children. The tape can
be presented at the parent meeting only if all group members consentto the viewing.
Coping Statements Memory Test
The purpose of this portion of the session is to try to strengthen the
children’s memory regarding coping statements. The list of coping state-ments reviewed last week gave them many examples but it is unlikely
that group members will work on memorizing them without being
reminded. You may use the following sample dialogue:
As we were talking about earlier, one way to keep calm is to tell
yourself statements that will help you feel less angry. We would like
to write down all of the coping statements that you can think of. You
can use any of the statements that are written on the list in your workbooks that we reviewed last week, but you cannot look at that
sheet now. You can also write down your own coping statements that
were not on the sheet. We just want to see how many di ff erent coping
statements you can think of.
109
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 121/289
If the group has trouble recalling coping statements, provide them with
an example from the following list:
■ “Just don’t sweat it”
■ “It is not worth getting in trouble”
■ “They don’t know what they are saying/talking about”
■ “I am not going to let it beat me”
■ “Other people like me”
■
“I know I am okay”
■ “Slow down”
■ “Don’t be a fool, stay cool”
■ “I am above this”
■ “I am not going to let them control me/get me/win”
■
“I am not going to give them that power”
Instruct the children to use the Coping Statements Memory Test work-
sheet in the workbook to record their statements. Allow between and
minutes to complete the exercise and then review as a group. Have
each group member select two favorite coping statements and place a
star beside them on his or her paper. You and your co-leader should
write these statements down on a piece of paper. It is important for
school personnel working with the child to have a copy of these state-ments for future reference, and it is important that group leaders refer
to these when problems arise.
Optional Videotape Viewing
If a videotape of a teasing exercise from a previous session is available, say,
We would like to look back at a videotape from an earlier session when
you were doing the self-control game. After we look at the tape, I will
ask you to tell us some of the things the di ff erent people said to themselves
when being teased. (Play tape) What were some of the things people said
110
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 122/289
to themselves when being teased? What things that people said do you
think you could say to yourself that would keep you from becoming more
angry? Are there any other things that you could say to yourself that
would help you to stay calm and stay out of a fi ght when you are angry?
Practicing Self-Control
When introducing the next self-control teasing exercise, remind the chil-
dren that they can use any of the coping statements generated on their
Coping Statements Memory Test worksheet. Place a large drawing of a thermometer on the floor (or simply identify the low, middle, and high
areas using paper or another form of marker) and ask each group mem-
ber to stand on the “thermometer” during a self-control exercise. They
are to move up and down the thermometer with increasing and decreas-
ing levels of anger. Have the group stand in a circle around the person
who is being exposed to the teasing or in front of the “thermometer”
during the teasing exercise. If the group member who is practicing self-
control is unable to use coping statements and engages in dialogue with
other group members, ask that she turn away from the group in order to
help her focus on using coping statements. In addition, you can make
the rule that the person practicing self-control cannot speak to other
group members and must always begin their statements with the word,
“I” (not “you”). It may benefit the group if one or more of the leaders
engaged in the exercise first so that the children feel more comfortable
with the task.
You may use the following sample dialogue to introduce the exercise:
The next thing we are going to do is have each of you practice using
Coping Statements while being teased by your fellow group members.
The same rules as before apply: you cannot curse, you cannot make
racial comments, and you cannot touch other group members.
During this exercise, the person being teased should say things to her-
self that will keep her from becoming angry. You can use any of the
ideas we just thought of and wrote down or you can use whatever
coping statement works for you. While people are teasing, we want
the person to be walking up and down the thermometer as a way to
indicate how angry she feels inside. As the teasing begins to bother
111
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 123/289
you, we would expect that you would be higher up on the thermome-
ter. As you say coping statements, we are hoping that you will feel less
angry and will move back down the thermometer. Does everybody
understand what we are going to do?
We are going to do this exercise two times with every person in the
group. The fi rst time you receive teasing, we are going to ask that
you say your coping statements out loud so that everyone can
hear you. During the second time, we want you to say the coping
statements to yourself (in your head) rather than saying them out
loud. This is how we usually use coping statements. After the
second time, we will ask you to tell us which coping statements
you used.
Optional Self-Control Exercise
This optional exercise is designed to extend the concept of self-talk for
use in diff erent kinds of situations or with diff erent feeling states. You
may introduce it as follows:
We have talked in here about the things you can say to yourself when
you are feeling angry to help you stay calm and to be able to think
about di ff erent ways to handle these angry feelings. As you remem-
bered, at the beginning of the group meetings, we talked about many
di ff erent kinds of feelings. Who can remember some of the other feel-
ings we identi fi ed? We wanted to talk some about the things you can
say to yourself when you are feeling di ff erent emotions rather than
just anger.
■ What are some situations where you might feel afraid/worried?
■ What is something you could say to yourself when you are feeling
afraid that would help you to stay calm and decide how to han-
dle the situation?
Elicit diff erent ideas for self-statements that would be useful in fear-
producing situations.
■ What does it mean to feel disappointed?
112
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 124/289
■ What is something you can say to yourself when you are feeling disap-
pointed that would help you to cope with the situation that makes
you feel this way?
Elicit diff erent ideas for self-statements that would be useful in disap-
pointing situations.
■ What kinds of things make you feel sad?
■ What are some things you could say to yourself that would help you to
cope with these situations?
Elicit diff
erent ideas for self-statements that would be useful in sad sit-uations. You can have group members generate diff erent situations that
elicit these various feelings and have them role-play these situations
using the coping self-statements.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes,
if applicable.
113
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 125/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep aneye out for any potential problems that may arise between group members
during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem solving.
114
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 126/289
115
Chapter 13 Session : Relaxation and Overcoming Barriers
to Self-Control
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Deep breathing script
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Teach self-control through deep breathing
■ Identify and overcome barriers to the use of self-control
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from theprevious week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 127/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Self-Control Through Deep Breathing
Remind group members of the exercise they did last week during which
they used coping statements to make them feel less angry when being
teased (shown by moving along a big thermometer). Introduce the idea that it can sometimes be diff icult to use this type of self-control in real-life
situations and that today you will introduce the group to breathing exer-
cises that will increase their ability to use self-control. Use the following
script to engage the children in a deep/diaphragmatic breathing exercise.
Deep Breathing Script
Get into a comfortable position. Put one hand on your stomach and the other
on your chest. Inhale slowly and watch which hand moves. Shallow breaths
move the hand on the chest; deep breaths move the hand on the stomach.
Now, slowly inhale through your nose. As you inhale, count slowly to three
and feel your stomach expand with your hand. Hold the breath for one sec-
ond and then slowly exhale while also counting to three. When you inhale,
think of the word “inhale.” When you exhale, think of the word “relax.”
Inhale . . . . . . . . . Hold . . . Relax . . . . . . . . . Continue deep
breathing for several minutes, becoming more relaxed with every exhale.
After practicing the breathing exercises, ask group members to review
some other strategies they can use to calm themselves down when they
are feeling angry. Explain to children that everyone becomes angry or
frustrated at times, and it is important for people to be able to calmdown after becoming angry and before they do something out of anger.
When a person slows down his or her anger reaction, they are able to
make better choices for how to cope with the situation. Remind chil-
dren that deep breathing is one way to calm down and ask them for any
116
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 128/289
other strategies they can think of. “What are some other ways that people
can calm down when they have become angry?”
You and your co-leader may supplement this exercise with other similar
breathing or relaxation exercises that you are familiar with and are
appropriate for this age group. A sample relaxation script and discussion
questions are provided for children in the workbook.
Identifying and Overcoming Barriers to Use of Self-Control
Engage children in a discussion about obstacles to the eff ective use of self-
talk. Reiterate the idea that it is sometimes diff icult to use self-control in
real life situations. Specifically, when people are really angry, it may be
diff icult to stop quickly enough to use the self-talk or any other self-
control technique. Discuss ways to make self-talk more likely to work. Ask
children, “What are some of the things that get in the way of using coping state-
ments during times of anger or stress? Why do you think it is easier to use these
coping statements in group than when you are outside in the real world?”
Write down each of the obstacles/barriers that children raise and ask
questions like:
■ How do you think you could overcome this barrier?
■ What do you think you could do that would help you to cope with
this problem?
Role-play diff icult situations for children and include obstacles intro-
duced in the preceding discussion in the role-play. Have children role-
play their solution for overcoming that barrier.
Introduce the idea that sometimes, even if we walk away from or avoid
a conflict with another person, we still feel angry or aroused inside. Ask
the following questions:
■ Have you ever walked away from a fi ght?
■ Have you ever been able to ignore people who were bothering you?
■ How do you feel after you have walked away from a fi ght?
■ What feeling do you have after avoiding a con fl ict?
117
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 129/289
It is very likely that all group members have experienced having to walk
away from conflict. If they do not volunteer any examples, use exam-
ples from your own experiences with conflict situations and your feel-
ings after having walked away. Normalize the feeling of anger but focuson the positive aspects associated with dealing eff ectively with conflict.
Also, introduce the idea of engaging in positive activities in order to feel
more positively about the self. You may ask children:
■ What are some things you can do if you are still feeling
angry/upset/sad in order to feel better again?
■
What are some of the things you do to calm down?
■ What are some ways you can stop feeling mad?
Refer children to the workbook page entitled, What Can I Do to Calm
Myself Down. On this page are examples of some self-soothing activi-
ties or arousal-reduction techniques including the strategies listed here.
There are four blank lines included on the page. Ask each child to
write down activities that they can think of to help themselves to calm
down. Then, review with the group. Possible activities include:
■ Playing sports
■ Talking to a friend
■ Drawing
■ Listening to music
■ Going for a walk or exercising
■ Playing a game (e.g., Nintendo, Playstation, etc.)
■ Playing with a pet
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the Goal Sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed Goal Sheets
to next week’s session.
118
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 130/289
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselvesand/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at
the end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to
keep an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between
group members during this time and use it as an opportunity to prac-
tice problem solving.
119
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 131/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 132/289
121
Chapter 14 Session : Perspective Taking – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Optical illusion to illustrate concept of perspective
■ Pictures depicting children in conflictive situations for use during the
stimulus activity
■ Audiotape recorder (optional)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Establish the concept of perspective taking
■ Identify diff erent perspectives of a social situation
■ Conduct brief introduction to “blind spots”
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 133/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Rememberto award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Establish the Concept of Perspective Taking
The main purpose of this session is to help group members understand
that situations can be seen from diff erent points of view. You may want
to say the following to explain this concept:
Di ff erent people can see the same thing or the same problem/situation
very di ff erently. Although viewpoints may di ff er, there is some validity
to all points of view and all points of view have some capacity of
being justi fi ed.
An additional goal is to help group members understand that these
perceptions influence our thoughts and feelings, which in turn have animpact on our behavior.
Given that people’s perceptions may di ff er in a situation, the thoughts
and feelings that each person has in a situation may also di ff er.
Optical Illusion Activity
This activity reinforces the concept that people can see the same thing
diff erently. Have each group member look at the optical illusion sheet in
the workbook and write down on a piece of paper what they see without
looking at what other people have written down. A copy of the optical
illusion is also provided here (see Figure .). Once all group members
122
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 134/289
have written down their response, ask each person to state what they
perceived the illustration to be. You and your co-leader may want to
participate in this exercise as well. Emphasize that everyone looked at the
same picture, but that diff erent people saw diff erent things. This exercisecan be repeated with other visual illusion pictures if desired.
Stimulus Card Activity
This is a continuation and elaboration of the concept of perspective
taking. The purpose of this exercise is to:
■ Teach children that our thoughts about another person’s intentionsand motives influence how we think, feel, and react to one another.
■ Show more fully how difficult it is to know other people’s motives
and intentions.
For this portion of the session you will need a picture (from a book,
magazine, cartoon strip, etc.) that depicts an ambiguous conflictive
situation involving a number of characters. For example, the picture can
show a group of children involved in a conflict, or a child having
difficulty joining a new activity with peers, or a conflict between a child
and a teacher or between a child and a parent, etc.
Use the picture to perform a brief role-play by having each group
member portray a person in the picture. You or your co-leader will
assume the role of roving reporter for fake news channel WTVD.
Instruct children to portray the situation from the picture. The “roving reporter” should stop the role-play just prior to the resolution of the
problem and tell members to “freeze” in their spots. Then, go around to
each group member individually and tape record (optional) their
responses to the Roving Reporter Questions listed on page 124. These
questions are also included in the children’s workbook.
123
Figure 14.1 Optical Illusion
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 135/289
■ What was the problem?
■ When did you first see a problem?
■ Who had the problem?
■ What were you thinking to yourself as the problem happened?
■ How did you feel?
■ What are you going to do next?
■ What can you do or say to solve the problem?
■ What do you think the outcome will be?
■ How do you think other people saw the problem?
■ What would other people say the problem is?
■ Why do you think the person did what he did?
Once all the children have been interviewed, have them return to
their seats to listen to each other’s responses (if taped) and to have a brief discussion. You may ask the following questions to facilitate the
discussion.
■ Did people see the things di ff erently?
■ Did they have di ff erent thoughts?
■ What caused those di ff erences?
■ Did their thoughts and feelings a ff ect what they were going to do
next?
Introduction to “Blind Spots”
Conduct a brief introduction to how people’s feelings may interfere
with being able to read the intentions of others accurately. You may usethe following sample dialogue:
Negative outcomes of previous interactions with others can generate
bad feelings. These bad feelings can then in fl uence how you see
other people and what intentions you ascribe to them. These feelings
124
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 136/289
can cause us to ignore some cues that these people give to us or cause
us to ignore important information. Being frustrated with teachers
or others can lead you to perceive only those behaviors that will
make you more upset, and to miss behaviors that would lead you to feel more positively about that person. We call this process develop-
ing “blind spots.” Blind spots happen when we let feelings from past
situations in fl uence how we see people in current situations. This
can happen with friends, family members, and teachers. Over the
next couple of weeks we will be spending more time exploring this
issue more fully.
Before you close the session with the usual activities, let the children
know that next week’s homework assignment will be to interview one
of their teachers. Children should take the week to think about
which teacher they’d like to interview and what questions they would
like to ask.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet
in the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets
to next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
125
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 137/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep aneye out for any potential problems that may arise between group members
during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask students to begin thinking about a teacher they want to interview and any questions they would like to ask him.
126
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 138/289
127
Chapter 15 Session : Perspective Taking – Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Pictures depicting children in conflictive situations (see Session )
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify diff erent perspectives of a situation
■ Apply perspective taking to a social situation
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Group Leader Note:
■ The homework assignment for this week is to contact a teacher to
schedule an interview. Make sure that the teachers are aware of the
assignment and are willing to participate.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 139/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be usedto have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Continuation of Perspective Taking Exercises
Perception exercises are designed to expand the concept of perspec-
tive taking. We want to assist children in recognizing that the infor-
mation we have represents only our view of the world and that
sometimes we make inaccurate judgments about a problem or situa-
tion because our view is limited. The exercises illustrate and reinforce
group members’ understanding that some conflicts are based on
diff erences in perceptions (i.e., what someone thought they saw).
Resolving conflicts can be diff icult at times because not all people see
a problem in the same way, or diff erent people focus on a diff erent
part of the problem.
Choose one of the following three perception exercises.
Exercise # 1 – What Could It Be?
In this exercise, you will hand out to each child a piece of paper describ-
ing a particular part of an elephant. However, do not let the children
know that the parts belong to an elephant. Ask each child to think
about the description she has received (each child should get a diff erent
description) and what it could possibly refer to. The goal of the exercise
is for all the children to put their descriptions together to figure out that
the object being described is an elephant.
128
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 140/289
Introduce the activity as follows:
We are going to give each of you a piece of paper that gives you a
description of part of an object. When you receive your description of
the object, try to think of all the di ff erent kinds of objects this could
be. We will then ask all of you to try to fi gure out together what the
object is based on all the di ff erent parts of the object that you have.
Distribute the following descriptions to the children (one description
per child).
■ You feel a thin, flat object that moves slowly back and forth.
■ You feel a rough-textured, thick object kind of like a tree trunk,
with wrinkles in it.
■ You feel a long, hollow object with wrinkles on it and a hole in
the end of it.
■ You feel a very large, rounded object.
■
You feel a smooth, long, pointed object that feels almost like a smooth stone.
■ You feel a thin, rope-like object with strands on the end.
OR
■ What you feel is like a fan.
■ What you feel is like a tree.
■ What you feel is like a rope.
■ What you feel is like a spear.
■ What you feel is like a high wall.
■ What you feel is like a snake.
Once each child has his or her description, instruct the group to try to
figure out what the larger object is. Have each child describe his or her
part and work together with the other students to put all the pieces
together to figure out that what is being described is an elephant. An
alternative approach to this exercise is to tell the group that you will be
reading them descriptions of diff erent parts of the same object, and you
129
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 141/289
want them to draw the diff erent parts and try to figure out what the
whole object is; this can be accomplished by having each child draw each
descriptive piece on separate pieces of paper, or to use the dry erase board
or flipchart and have each child draw one of the component parts. Aftereach child has drawn her object, or after the group has completed the
drawing, ask them to discuss the diff erent possible options for what the
object is and to come to a consensus about what the object is.
Exercise # 2 – Wise Man and the _____
Read the following story to the group. DO NOT read the title out loud
because it reveals the answer. Have group members try to guess what the
object is.
Wise Man and the Elephant
Con fl ict is as old as time itself. People have always tried to make
sense of the world and understand each other. At times, this is
di ff icult because not all people see a problem in the same way. As you
listen to this old Indian tale, see if you can discover the cause of the
wise men’s misunderstanding.
Once upon a time, there were six wise men living together in a small
town. The six wise men were blind. One day, an object was brought to
the town. The six men wanted to see the object but how could they? “I
know,” said the fi rst man. “We will feel it!” “Good idea,” said the
others. “Then we will know what it is like.” So the six men went to see
the object. The fi rst man touched something that felt big and fl at and
moved from side to side. He said, “It is like a fan.” The second man
was feeling a di ff erent part of the object and exclaimed, “No, it feels
like a tree trunk!” The third man shouted out, “You are both wrong, it
feels like a thin rope that tapers at the end!” Just at that moment the fourth man pricked his fi nger on a sharp part of the object and yelled,
“It is not like a rope, a fan, or a tree—it is like a sharp spear. I just
pricked my fi nger on it!” At this moment the fi fth man called out, “No,
no, this is like a high wall. Strong and sturdy.” The sixth man did not
130
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 142/289
agree with any of the others. He stated that the object reminded him of
a snake; it was long and cylindrical and moved around in many direc-
tions. The six wise men argued and argued and could not come to an
agreement as to what they were touching.
Can you help them to discover what it was that they were touching?
(Answer: Elephant)
Ask the group what was the problem that led to the wise men being
unable to “see” the object (each took only their own perspective and
therefore were limited in their view). Be sure to stress the importance of
listening to other people’s perspectives—without listening to others, itis hard to have a complete understanding of what we are looking at.
Also, tie in the notion that sometimes we can get into trouble because
we fight for what we think is right (e.g., we think that somebody pur-
posely knocked our books over, but it was really an accident).
Exercise # 3 – What’s in the Bag?
Another exercise that conveys a similar idea is to utilize a stuff ed animal
as a stimulus. Place the stuff ed animal into a bag and have each child
take a turn feeling the stuff ed animal and making a guess as to what it
is. After each child has had an opportunity to feel the animal, ask the
group to come to a consensus about what the object is. You can intro-
duce this exercise by first reading the wise man and elephant story and
then engaging in this task. Process the exercise with the group by ask-ing the following questions.
■ Why was/wasn’t it hard to come up with a group answer?
■ How were you able to come up with your answer about what the
object was?
■ Could you have fi gured it out without the other members’ ideas?
■ Was the solution based only on the information that you were pro-
vided?
■ Did you try to take in information from other group members before
suggesting an idea about what the object was?
131
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 143/289
Why Did This Happen? Exercise
The purpose of the following exercise is to illustrate that, in order to
avoid making false assumptions about the reason for another person’sbehavior, we have to delay responding until we can ask ourselves or the
other person, “Why did this happen?”
If you wish, you may use one of the stimulus pictures from Session
to discuss perspective taking. Pick a picture that has a problem that can
be interpreted in diff erent ways and show it to the group. Ask group
members to talk about what is happening in the picture and the reasons
why these things are happening. Have the students generate various
intentions or motivations for one of the characters in the situation (e.g.,
“What are the reasons she might have done that?”). Write down all the
intentions that were generated on the dry erase board or flipchart. In
order to facilitate understanding of the relationship between motiva-
tions and consequences, ask group members to generate what they
think the parental response would be for each of the motivations
they came up with. Record the response next to the identified inten-tion/motivation. As group members are discussing their responses,
either you or your co-leader can write down the motives presented by
the group members on individual slips of paper for use during the next
exercise.
Motive in a Hat Exercise
Place all slips of paper with motives written on them in a hat (or
other container) and have each group member choose one of the slips
(if you are running out of time, it would be fine for only one or two
group members to conduct the role-play). These motives will be their
role-play exercises. For example, the situation can be, “Tom stomps
into the house and slams the door. Why did Tom slam the door?”
. It was an accident.
. Tom slammed the door to annoy his mother.
. Tom was sick and needed to go to the bathroom.
132
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 144/289
Following the role-played situation, ask group members to guess what
intention the person was trying to portray. (Generally, group members
cannot guess the correct intention, thus group leaders can emphasize
how diff icult it is to know why someone did something even if they know possible reasons). Encourage group members to remind them-
selves how diff icult it is to determine why people do the things they do
and that there may be more than one reason why people do the things
they do (i.e., conflicting goals or motivations).
Intentions
Have a brief discussion about the four main groupings of intentions.
Now that children understand that diff erent people do things for
diff erent reasons, work with them to label the various types of inten-
tions or reasons that people behave the way they do. See if group mem-
bers can identify the following intentions: () It was an accident, () I
was trying to be helpful, () I was purposefully trying to be mean or tomake someone mad, and () I am not sure. If they are unable to do so,
go over each of them with the group.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
133
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 145/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for more
details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between groupmembers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
Homework
✎ Remind students to select a teacher to interview and ask them to
complete the Scheduling a Teacher Interview form in their workbooks
before next session. Children should schedule their interviews for
some time after next week’s meeting.
134
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 146/289
135
Chapter 16 Session : Perspective Taking – Part III
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Pictures depicting children in conflictive situations (see Session )
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce “Accidental” and “Unclear/Don’t Know” attributions of
ambiguous social problems
■ Develop perspective-taking questions for teacher interview
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 147/289
Children who scheduled a teacher interview (and returned their form to
the group session) should receive two points for completing the assign-
ment. The teacher interview will be discussed further at the end of the
session.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Interpersonal Problem Discussion
In today’s session, you will solicit real-life situations from group
members in order to illustrate the diff iculty in being able to identify the
intentions or motives of other people. An additional goal of the session
is to demonstrate how our thoughts about another person’s motivations
and intentions will a ff ect how we think, feel, and react to others during
interactions. You and your co-leader can begin this discussion by describ-
ing a situation from your own lives (with peers, siblings, coworkers, par-
ents) when you misjudged another person’s intentions. Try to label or
categorize the assumed intention into one of the following categories:
■ Accident (Accidental: they did not mean to make me mad, it was
an accident)■ Being helpful (Prosocial: they were trying to help me out)
■ Being mean (Hostile: they were trying to make me angry or get
me upset)
■ Don’t know (Ambiguous: it is unclear why they did that, I don’t
know why they did that)
Develop visual cues to represent these four categories and have these
available for children to point to when identifying the intention of the
other person in the interaction. Relate the cues they used when identi-
fying the inappropriate intention, and to indicate what cues they did
not notice that may have helped them to more accurately perceive the
136
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 148/289
other person’s intention. Ask group members to relate a situation when
they misjudged another person’s intention or motive. Ask them to iden-
tify the cues they used to come to the inaccurate perception, the cues
that might have helped them to more accurately identify why the per-son did what they did, and what category the intention they ascribed to
the person and what category the person’s intention actually fell into.
“What did you pay attention to that made you think that’s why he did that?
What could you have paid attention to that would have made you see the
problem di ff erently?” If children are having diff iculty with this task,
introduce an ambiguous story and ask all group members why they
think the person in the story did what he or she did.
You may use the following example:
Say that you have gone into the lunchroom and are heading toward
the table where your best friend is sitting. When you sit down at the
table, he ignores you and keeps eating his sandwich. Why do you think
your friend ignored you? What kinds of things made you think that?
What would have caused you to see this problem di ff erently?
Optional Exercise
Ask group members to discuss problems with teachers. It may be
important to remind the group about the confidentiality rule at this
point. Using the dry erase board or flipchart, record any situation that
depicts a child-teacher interaction when things did not turn out the way the child wanted (e.g., teacher accused a student of doing something he
did not do, or a student feels that he has received a grade that is lower
than deserved). Ask group members to describe what the teacher did and
why he did it. Focus on labeling the teacher’s intentions according to the
scheme previously described. Some examples of how children may label
teacher’s intentions are: “she made a mistake (accident );” “he doesn’t like
me (hostile);” “she was trying to help me get a better grade” (helpful);
and “I don’t know why she did it (don’t know ).” Ask group members to
identify the cues that led them to believe the teacher was acting in a cer-
tain way, or how they detected the teacher’s intentions. Discuss the idea
that it is often diff icult to determine what a person’s motivation is. Refer
students to the page in the workbook entitled, Why Did This Happen.
137
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 149/289
Blind Spots
This activity is designed to illustrate how feelings may interfere with
being able to read intentions accurately, which can also interfere withbeing able to identify what another person’s intentions are. Explain to
children that negative outcomes of previous interactions can generate
bad feelings, which can then a ff ect how they see other people and what
intentions they ascribe to others. These feelings can cause people to
ignore some cues that others are giving them, or to ignore important
information. Being frustrated with teachers or others can lead children
to perceive only those behaviors that will make them more upset, andto miss behaviors that would lead them to feel more positively about
that person. This process is called developing “blind spots” and it can
be further explained with the following sample dialogue:
Blind spots happen when we let feelings from past situations a ff ect
how we see other people in situations that are happening now. We
will ignore some information when there are blind spots. Similarly,
teachers might have blind spots that a ff ect how they see you and your behavior in the classroom.
A stimulus picture from Session can be used to convey this concept
to the students. Cover up part of the picture on the card and ask each
child to guess what is going on in the picture. Following this, uncover
the whole picture and ask group members if their interpretation of the
problem would have been diff erent had they been able to see the entire
picture to begin with. Emphasize that often we have to interpret otherpeople’s actions based on partial information, which makes it more
diff icult to know what is going on.
Teacher Interview
Explain to students that the group will begin working on a newsletter
that will describe diff erent interviews between members of the Coping
Power Program and their teachers. Solicit from children questions they
would like to ask their teachers. Be prepared with suggestions of your
own. Some ideas include:
138
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 150/289
. How was school diff erent when you were young?
. How is school the same?
. What did you like the most about elementary/middle school?
. What did you like the least about elementary/middle school?
. What really cool thing do you remember about one of your
teachers in elementary/middle school?
. Did kids sometimes misunderstand why teachers had rules?
. What do you want to have happen when you are teaching a class?
. When a child makes noise and interrupts a class what is your goal
for the whole class, and with that student?
. What do you really like about teaching?
. Do you think teachers know how much kids look up to them for
the hard work they do?
Make sure the child ends the interview by asking questions and .
Optional Role-Play
If you wish, you may engage the group in a role-play exercise where
either you or your co-leader plays the part of the teacher while thegroup asks interview questions. Use the list of questions generated by
the children. Process the role-play with the group by asking one or more
of the following discussion questions:
■ What do you think the teacher was trying to tell the student?
■ How do you think the student reacted to what the teacher was saying?
■ How do you think the student feels toward the teacher?
■ Did the student have any blind spots that may have gotten in the way
of understanding why the teacher has rules?
139
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 151/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 152/289
optional exercise would be to request one or more teachers to attend
the first – minutes of the next group session. Using a group for-
mat, have each group member take turns asking the teacher(s) ques-
tions. Remind group members that they can earn two points forreturning their homework.
141
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 153/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 154/289
143
Chapter 17 Session : Perspective Taking and Problem
Solving
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ List of possible problem situations and solutions
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Discuss children’s teacher interviews
■ Introduce problem solving
■ Introduce the PICC Model
■ Teach the children how to break problems down into solvable steps
using the “Pick It Apart” method
■ Set new weekly goals
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 155/289
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
You will review children’s teacher interviews separately.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Review Teacher Interviews
Have each student be prepared to talk about her teacher interview withthe group. If the interview is being conducted during the group session,
have students take turns asking questions of the teacher(s). Record
responses on the dry erase board or flipchart or tape record the inter-
view. Ask students what they learned in the process of interviewing their
teachers. Some possible discussion questions are:
■ What did you learn in the process of interviewing your teacher?
■ Did you fi nd out anything about them that you didn’t already know?
■ How did you feel when you were interviewing your teacher?
■ Did this activity help you better understand why there are rules to fol-
low in class?
■ Were you surprised by anything that was said during the interview?
Remember to give two points to all members who completed the assign-ment. For those who did not complete the assignment, use your discretion
with reassigning the homework and giving points. You want to be careful
to not reward group members for not completing their homework (e.g.,
giving the same reward to those who return it late) but you want to be fair.
144
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 156/289
Problem Identification
Introduction to Problem Solving
Problem identification will be discussed as a component of the prob-
lem-solving process. Explain to children that over the next several
weeks, the group will talk about problem solving and how to make
good choices when they have problems with their friends or other peo-
ple in their lives. Before you start, ask the group to define what a prob-
lem is. Encourage students to provide a definition but do not force the
issue. If they are unable to describe it, you may use the following sam-ple dialogue to define problems.
A problem exists when there is something that gets in the way of a
goal that we want to reach or something that keeps us from getting
where we want to be. There are many examples of problems, some
are individual problems (e.g., your bike gets a fl at tire and you are
miles away from home), and some are group problems (e.g., your boy
scout troop is having trouble raising money for a fi eld trip). A prob-lem can also exist if two people want di ff erent goals and both goals
cannot be met with the same solution. For example, you have home-
work to do but you really want to watch your favorite TV show fi rst.
Your mother wants you to get your homework done before you can
watch TV. People can sometimes tell when there is a problem,
because they will feel angry or sad. Can you think of any examples
of problems?
Wait for the students to respond. If they do not spontaneously off er
examples, ask them to think of a problem that they have experienced in
school during the last week. You may want to use one of these examples
to demonstrate how to think through the steps of problem solving.
Introduction to PICC Model
Start the discussion by asking group members what they think the first
step to solving a problem is. Guide them toward creating the words asso-
ciated with the PICC model. P Problem, I Identification, C
Choices, and C Consequences. The “PICC” outline represents the
145
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 157/289
main problem-solving steps schematically and will be used throughout
the problem-solving sessions. Write the PICC schematic on the dry erase
board or flipchart. “PICC” follows the form of:
Problem Identification _________________________________
Choices Consequences
Defining a Problem in Solvable Steps
After the discussion about problem solving in general, introduce thenotion of “picking it apart.” You may use the following sample dia-
logue:
Great! You have some really good ideas about getting started with
problem solving. Let’s use the PICC chart (this should have already
been drawn on the dry erase board or fl ipchart) to “pick apart” a
problem and to “pick” good choices that really work for you. Let’s look
at an example of breaking down a problem into smaller parts.
Choose one of the following exercises to demonstrate the process of
picking apart a problem.
Exercise # 1 – My Car Is Not Working!
I had my car towed into the automotive shop and all of you were mechanics who worked at the shop. One of you asked me to describe
the reason that I had my car towed to the shop. I replied, “Because it
won’t run.” Would my answer be helpful to you? Would it help you to
fi gure out what is wrong?
Wait for the children to respond and then continue. Refer to the PICC
chart on display and write “Pick it apart Ask questions” underneath
the words “Problem Identification.” Leave enough room below to writethe children’s responses.
Problem Identification _______________
Pick it apart Ask questions
146
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 158/289
Continue by asking the group, “What kinds of things would you need to
know to fi gure out what was wrong with the car?” As the children generate
questions, try to reframe these questions into more general categories,
such as:
■ How often has it happened?
■ In what situations does it happen?
■ What happened just before the problem occurred?
■ What is not a ff ected by the problem?
Make sure that responses included things like:
■ It will not run after leaving my parking lights on all night (a bat-
tery or electrical problem)
■ I have not been to the gas station in a long time (car ran out of gas)
■ There was a loud crash under the car and since then there has
been a loud noise (muffler problem).
After sufficient additional information has been obtained, ask children to
think about what caused the problem with your car. Instruct the group to
solicit suggestions for what caused the problem and how understanding
what the problem is helps us to understand the cause of the problem.
Then, talk to children about your goal.
There is one other thing you probably want to ask me before you start
to work on my car. You will want to know what my goal is. For
example, you might ask me if I want the car fi xed no matter what
the cost or if I am only willing to pay a certain amount of money.
Instruct the group to solicit information that would help to identify your
goal and then, in response to the group’s questions, you can state that you
want it fixed only if the repairs cost less than $., since the car is pret-
ty old. If the repairs cost more than $., your goal would be to get
rid of the car and try to sell it “as-is.” Be sure to discuss how considering
the goal changes how you think about the problem. Frame these under
the terms Choices and Consequences (e.g., if you choose to fix only the
muffler but the transmission needs to be overhauled, the consequence
would be that you may not get much money when you try to sell it).
147
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 159/289
Exercise # 2 – My Video Game Is Not Working!
Let’s say that your brother wants to play a video game, but it isn’t
working. He comes to you and tells you that the game does not work.Does this help you to fi gure out what is wrong? What kinds of things
would you ask to fi gure out what the problem is?”
Again, as children are generating questions, try to reframe these ques-
tions into more general categories such as:
■ When does the problem occur?
■ What are some of the specific difficulties encountered?
Now, I want you to pretend that you are a video game repairman
while I play the role of your brother. Try to get a better idea of why
the game is not working by asking me some questions.
Encourage one group member to take on the role of the video game
repairman. Following are some of the questions that you would like this
person to ask so they get a better idea as to what is happening.
■ Is the power light on? (not plugged in, no electricity to operate
the machine)
■ Does the picture come on the screen but you cannot move the
figures? (the joystick is not plugged in correctly)
■ Is the TV screen on but the game does not show up on the screen?
(cartridge is not all the way in)
■ Does the TV work fine when the game is not plugged in? (the
Nintendo machine is probably broken)
■ Is the TV on the wrong channel? (needs to be on the right channel)
Ask the child playing the role of the repairman if now that she has more
information about the problem, she also has a better idea about what
might have caused the problem. Solicit suggestions for what caused theproblem and how understanding what the problem is helps us to under-
stand the cause of the problem. Then, explain that once the problem and
the cause of the problem have been identified, it is time to think about
what you (the brother) want. What is your goal? For example, do you
148
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 160/289
want to have the machine fixed no matter how much it costs, or would
you rather buy a new machine if the expense will be too great? Instruct
the group to solicit information that would help to identify what your
goal is. Note how consideration of the goal changes how you think aboutthe problem. Once again, frame these under the terms Choices and
Consequences (e.g., if you choose to get the game working no matter
what the cost and the problem is that the cartridge is jammed, the con-
sequence might be that you need to take the game to a repairman and
this would cost a lot of money. An option would be to see if a new game
would cost less money than getting the old one repaired).
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
149
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 161/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep aneye out for any potential problems that may arise between group mem-
bers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem
solving.
150
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 162/289
151
Chapter 18 Session : Social Problem Solving – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Complete introduction to problem solving from previous session
(Session )
■ Engage group in a problem-solving exercise
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 163/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember toaward points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Problem Identification
Continue last week’s discussion about problem solving and the PICC
Model.
Last time we met we talked about the PICC Model—can anyone tell
me what that refers to? (Wait for responses and prompt students as
needed.) Remember how we talked about the importance of really
knowing what a problem is before we try to solve it? (Wait for
responses and prompt as needed.)
Put the PICC Model on the dry erase board or flipchart so that all
group members can see it.
Problem Identification __________________
Pick it apart Ask questions
Choices Consequences
Choose one of the following two exercises to illustrate how to “pick
apart” a problem.
Exercise #1 – My Friends Won’t Let Me Play!
Engage in the “pick it apart” procedure with a vague social problem.
Introduce to the students the problem of a child not wanting to play
with them. Using the PICC chart, try to determine more explicitly
what the problem is.
Here is the problem. My name is Tim and I have a friend named
Bob. I see Bob walking in front of my house and I run outside to ask
him if he wants to play with me. When I asked him he responded by
152
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 164/289
saying “No” and kept on walking. Can you help me to fi gure out
what the problem is? What questions should I ask myself?
Make it appear as though you think that Bob doesn’t like you so you
have decided that you are never going to ask him to play again.
Obviously, this is not a good solution. Ask group members to help you
come up with a diff erent interpretation to the problem; ask them to
provide you with a list of possible questions that you could ask so that
you could be sure of what the problem is. For example:
■ When are the times he will not play with you (e.g., dinner time)?
■ Is this all the time or only sometimes?
■ What is he doing when he will not play with you?
■ Are there other people around when you ask him to play?
■ How do you ask him to play with you?
■ Did he play with you in the past?
Off er responses to these questions and create a scenario in which the
only times that Bob will not play are when he has to get home for din-
ner or when you ask him to play tennis, which is a game that Bob does
not like. Point out that one way to solve the problem would be to ask
him to do something else besides play tennis—find out what games he
likes to play or approach him after dinner is over.
Exercise #2 – Parent-Child Conflict
Role-play a situation that involves a parent-child conflict. Either you or
your co-leader can play the part of the parent, while one of you takes
on the role of the child. The basic scenario to portray is one in which
the child asks the parent if he can go to the mall or stay up an hour later
to watch a TV show, and the parent says, “No! I asked you to clean yourroom today, and your room is still a mess.” Ask group members to
define the problem in the situation. If the child suggests the problem is
that “Mom is not fair” or that “I never get to do what I want,” discuss
how this problem definition may actually hinder problem solving,
153
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 165/289
because there is little that the child can do to resolve the problem. Here
are some suggested questions to ask the group members.
■ What is the problem according to the mom?
■ What is the problem according to the child?
■ When would this be a problem?
■ How did this problem emerge?
■ What is the child’s goal?
■
What is the parent’s goal?
Problem Identification and Solution Formation
Introduce the relationship between problem identification and solution
generation by having the children play a game. The goal of the game is
for students to come up with solutions to a problem in minutes. If
they can come up with solutions, each group member earns one extra
point for the session; if they can’t, the group does not earn any extra
points. You may use the following sample dialogue to introduce the game:
Now we are going to have you play a game. What we want you to do
is to try to think of di ff erent solutions to this problem (refer chil-
dren to the page in the workbook entitled, These Boys Have a
Problem to Solve). This is a picture of three boys, and the middle
boy is saying, “I can help them solve this problem.” We want you to
think of as many solutions to this problem as you can. We want you
to do this as fast as you can—the solutions can be good solutions or
bad solutions, it doesn’t matter. We will write down your solutions as
you come up with them. Ready? Go!
Either you or your co-leader should record the solutions as they are gen-
erated and keep them in list format on the far side of the dry erase board
or flipchart. You will use the rest of the board for the second part of the
exercise. Possible solutions include:
. Try to get the two boys to talk to each other.
. Help his friend Dan by hitting Tom.
154
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 166/289
. Go tell a teacher that there is a fight on the playground.
. Convince Dan that it is not worth getting in trouble and they
should just leave.
. Go get a basketball and see if they will play a game and become
friends again.
. Refer the boys to peer mediation.
. Tell Tom he will get his brother to beat him up if he hits Dan
again.
. Say to Tom that they do not like to be hit by other kids.
. Ask Dan if he wants to come over to his house and get away from
this place.
. Begin to talk about the fun things that they did at school that
day.
Following this exercise, categorize the solutions students generated into
more general solution types. For example, you can use the following
categories to help the children understand that there are some general
ways to classify solutions:
■ Help Seeking
■ Verbal Assertion
■ Direct Action
■ Physical Aggression
■ Verbal Aggression
■ Compromise or Bargaining
■ Avoidance or Nonconfrontation
This type of categorization will help students to develop more complete
ideas of how problems can be solved, and they will learn that there are
several diff erent types of solutions within each category. Write down the
general categories on the dry erase board or flipchart.
155
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 167/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of –minutes at the end
of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep an eye
out for any potential problems that may arise between group members
during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem solving.
156
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 168/289
157
Chapter 19 Session : Social Problem Solving – Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify and evaluate consequences for solutions
■ Demonstrate the diff erence between automatic thinking and
deliberate thinking
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 169/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Identifying Consequences for Solutions
To begin today’s session, ask the group for a definition of a consequence.
So far, we have talked a lot about how we should de fi ne a problem.We have said that we need to look at problems from many di ff erent
angles or viewpoints so we can get a complete understanding of what
is going on. We have also talked about the importance of generating
many solutions for a problem so we can evaluate the solutions and
choose the best one. What we haven’t talked about is how we actually
evaluate our choices. How do we know which choice is the best one?
Wait for the group to respond. Praise anyone who comes up with thenotion of looking at consequences or outcome. If nobody comes up
with an answer, ask the group the following question: “Has anyone
heard of the word consequence?” If someone has, ask that child to tell the
rest of the group what the word means. If no one has heard the word
before, explain to students that a consequence is what happens as a
result of something you do, or it is what happens after you do some-
thing. Provide a simple example of a consequence such as, “What hap-
pens if you leave a chocolate bar in the car on a hot day?” (Answer: It
melts.) “ Melting is the consequence that is associated with your behavior of
leaving your chocolate bar in the car on a hot day.”
Present a problem to the group (you may use one of the problem situ-
ations generated in a previous group session) and brainstorm solutions
(good and bad) using the PICC format:
Problem Identi fi cation ________________
Pick It Apart “Ask questions”
Choices Consequences
158
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 170/289
Once all the solutions have been generated, ask group members to iden-
tify what the consequences are for each solution. It is also useful to ask
group members to state what the goal is for each of the solutions and to
encourage their recognition of the relationship between problemdefinition, the goal being pursued, and the solutions that are generated.
Examples of questions to be asked during the discussion are:
■ What would be the consequence for this solution?
■ What would happen after this solution was used?
■ What else might happen?
■ What else might the other person do?
■ What else might the other person feel?
Generate several consequences for each solution.
The point of the preceding exercise is to introduce the idea that there
are often several consequences for one solution and, if you want to
make a good decision, you must think of all the possible consequences.
Evaluating Consequences
Using the consequences that have been generated to the problem
situation just described, ask group members, “How can you tell if a
consequence is ‘good’ or ‘bad’? What makes a consequence good versus bad?”
Introduce the idea that a consequence is good if it helps the person to
reach an important goal. It may be useful to discuss the diff erence
between long-term and short-term goals (e.g., fighting may help to
reach the short-term goal of feeling strong/important/tough but may
get in the way of reaching the long-term goal of doing well in school,
having a good job, staying out of trouble).
Using the PICC chart with consequences listed, ask group members to
rate each of the consequences as either good or bad or okay. Then ask
group members to indicate which of the possible solutions generated
would be the best solution based on the consequences. This further
illustrates the idea that there may be several options or choices in every
situation, and there may be several consequences for each solution.
159
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 171/289
“When making a decision, it is useful to think about all the consequences
and think about what you want to have happen and make your choice
based on the solution that will help you achieve that goal.”
The point of this exercise is to convey to the group members that, in order
to make good choices, we must evaluate the consequences of our choices.
Refer children to the Problem Solving – PICC Model in the workbook
and review.
Automatic Responding Versus Thinking Ahead: Part One
The following exercise is designed to teach children to recognize the
diff erence between solutions that are generated in an automatic mode
of responding and those that are generated when people think before
responding. It is important to convey to the students the idea that if
they are able to stop and think before responding, they will often be
able to think of better solutions.
Engage the children in a game where they think of as many possible
solutions to a problem as they can. Again, you may use a problem situ-
ation generated in a previous group session. Instruct group members to
respond to you as quickly as possible, giving you every possible solution
they can think of. Children should say the first thing that pops into
their heads, regardless of whether the solution is “right” or “wrong” or
“good” or “bad.” Either you or your co-leader should record all of the
responses on the dry erase board or flipchart. Do not evaluate any of thesolutions off ered, but instead ask for clarification if a solution is not
clearly delineated (e.g., “Why do you think that would solve the problem?”
Or “How would that solve this problem?”). If a child off ers a solution that
is a variation of a solution previously mentioned, point out that this is
a variation and then list it with the solutions generated.
After generating a long list of solutions, ask group members to identify
the consequences for these solutions and evaluate the consequences interms of being good (), okay (), or bad ().
160
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 172/289
Group Leader Note:
■ You will need a copy of the solutions and the consequence ratings so
you can compare them to the new ones that will be generated in a similar exercise to be conducted next week. Be sure to write them
down and have them available for next week.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the Goal Sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed Goal Sheets
to next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at
the end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember tokeep an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between
group members during this time and use it as an opportunity to prac-
tice problem solving.
161
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 173/289
Homework
✎ Instruct the children to complete the Problem-Solving Worksheet in
the workbook and bring it to next week’s session. The target problemcan be one experienced at home, in school, or in the community. The
solution should be carried out and the consequences noted in the
space provided. Encourage group members to think before responding
and to evaluate all available options. Remind group members that
they will receive two points for completing the assignment.
162
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 174/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 175/289
Review children’s completed Problem-Solving Worksheets. Group mem-
bers who completed their homework should receive two points. Discuss
the target problems, choices, and consequences.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Automatic Responding Versus Thinking Ahead: Part Two
Remind the children of last week’s discussion regarding generating
solutions to problems and the game they played in which the group
generated multiple solutions to a particular problem. Explain to the
children that today the group is going to play a similar game, but
instead of generating all the answers they can possibly think of, they are going to think about the consequences of each solution and iden-
tify only those they think will have good outcomes. Stress the impor-
tance of thinking through the consequences of the solutions before
choosing one. Use the same real-life problem that was used during
last week’s exercise.
After solutions have been generated, ask group members to look at
the two lists of solutions (one from today and one from the previoussession) and decide which list has better ideas on it. Ask group mem-
bers to generate the consequences for each of the solutions off ered in
today’s exercise and then rate the consequences as good (), bad
(), or okay (). Point out that, in general, people can come up with
better solutions if they stop to think about the following things:
■ What is the problem?
■ What do I want to see happen?
■ What are my choices for solving this problem?
This sequence usually produces better results than if the person simply
responded without thinking about the choices first.
164
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 176/289
Remind group members to use breathing techniques (see Session ) or
other methods to help them calm down before they make a decision.
Inform them that right now the focus is on their ability to “stop and
think,” rather than their ability to think quickly. This is because they areat the early stages of learning how to make good decisions, and because
of this they need to proceed slowly. As children get better at making
good decisions they will be able to do so faster and the whole process will
not seem as tedious and difficult. One way to explain this to the group
is to use the metaphor of learning to play a new video game.
Learning how to make good decisions is like learning to play a
new video game. The fi rst few times you play a new game you
need to really think about what you are doing and how to win the
game. You make mistakes and you learn from those mistakes. After
playing the game for a while, you can play without thinking very
much, and your playing becomes much more automatic. It is the
same for solving problems. First you will have to stop and really
think about what options are available and what the consequences
are for each solution. But after a while, your responding will become much more automatic and you will not have to think as
much as you do now.
Trouble at Sea Exercise
This exercise is designed to introduce and extend the concept of conse-quence identification and to assist students in better understanding the
problem-solving process. Explain that the group as a whole will be dis-
cussing a situation and that they must come to some agreement regarding
items to keep and items to discard. (An optional way to complete this
activity is to give the list of items to all the students and ask them to decide
which items they would keep and which items they would throw over-
board.) Having pictures of the objects, or the actual objects themselves, to
help demonstrate this exercise generally heightens the level of interest and
participation among the group members. Explain the story as follows:
You are all members of a fi shing party on a boat that has run into
bad weather and has some engine trouble several miles from shore.
165
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 177/289
The captain of the boat has told you that because of the rough
weather the boat needs to be lighter in order to make it through the
storm and to avoid sinking. You as members of the crew need to
decide which items to keep and which items to throw overboard.You need to decide as a group the order in which you throw the fol-
lowing items overboard.
. Box of matches
. Radio (ship to shore)
. Compass
. Navigational map
. gallons of water
. Signal fl ares
. Life rafts
. feet of rope
. Flashlight
. Life jackets
Allow group members five minutes to discuss the problem and
decide which items would be thrown overboard first. Encourage
students to identify the consequences for throwing each item
overboard, and to use the identified consequences in their decisions
about which items to keep and which items to discard. Ask group
members:
■ What was the problem in this situation?
■ Did di ff erent people have di ff erent ideas about which items to throw
overboard?
■ How did you decide which items to keep and which ones to throw
overboard?
■ Did thinking about the consequences help you decide which items to
keep?
166
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 178/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheetin the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets
to next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes,
if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
167
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 179/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 180/289
169
Chapter 21 Session : Social Problem Solving – Part IV
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize Box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Introduce the notion of timing in relation to problem solving
■ Reinforce persistence in problem solving
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 181/289
Problem-Solving Etiquette
During this portion of the session, you will introduce to the group ideas
regarding when and when not to try and solve problems. Refer childrento the Basics of Problem Solving handout in their workbooks and ask
them the following questions:
. “When are good times to approach another person to discuss a
problem?”
Elicit or shape responses that include the following:
■ All people involved in the conflict have time to talk about and
resolve the problem
■ All people are calm
■ When the discussion is held in a private setting
. “When are bad times to try to talk to another person about a
problem?”
Elicit or shape responses that include the following:
■ When you or the other person is very angry
■ When the other person is busy with something or is trying to
finish something
■ When you are too busy to be able to focus on problem solving
■ When the setting is not private and needs to be
. “What are some things to avoid when trying to talk to another
person about the problem?”
Elicit or shape responses that include the following:
■ Blaming the other person
■ Guessing the other person’s intentions (if unsure of what the otherperson’s intention was, it is better to ask, rather than tell them
what you think it was)
■ Making broad generalizations (be concerned with a specific
problem and be specific when talking to the other person;
avoid making statements that include the words “you always”)
170
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 182/289
■ Bringing up old and irrelevant issues (i.e., the past should not
be brought into the current problem)
■ Attacking or putting down the other person
Obstacles and Persistence to Overcoming Them
Introduce the idea of obstacles and persistence in dealing with them.
Recall the idea of “barriers” that was discussed in Session on goal
setting. Ask the group, “Who can remember what a barrier is?”
Elicit/shape a response that a barrier is something that gets in the way
of achieving a goal by asking the group the following:
■ Are there things that could get in the way of your meeting your goal?
■ What might get in the way of this solution working?
■ What are some of the things that might happen so that this solution
would not work?
Elicit from group members some potential barriers to this resolution.
Introduce the idea of having “back-up” or alternative solutions at hand
in case the first solution doesn’t work for some reason. You may use the
following example:
Your goal is to improve your math grade. The fi rst solution is to spend
more time on your math homework. A potential barrier may be that
although you are spending more time doing your math homework, youare still having di ffi culty understanding how to do it.
Ask group members the following:
■ What can you do if the fi rst solution you try doesn’t work?
■ Are there any other solutions you can try?
■ Why is it useful to have several possible solutions in mind when facing a problem?
171
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 183/289
Solvers and Blockers Exercise
The following exercise is designed to reinforce the idea of obstacles and
involves playing a game called “Solve That Problem.” This game isconducted in a game show format. Divide the group into two teams, each
with an approximately equal number of members. Toss a coin to see which
team will be the Solvers and which team will be the Blockers . The basic
idea of this game is that there will be one team determining solutions to a
problem and deciding on the best solution, while the opposing team will
try to think of “blocks” or obstacles that would cause that solution not to
work and reasons why that solution might fail. The categories for thisgame are peer conflict and conflicts with friends.
The Solvers can choose the category in which they want to solve
a problem. Present them with a problem from the Solve That Problem
page in the workbook and give them minutes to think of several
diff erent solutions (need to come up with at least three alternatives) and
to choose the solution they believe would work best.
Once The Solvers have indicated their solution choice, give The
Blockers minutes to think about diff erent obstacles to the proposed
solution and to present the best (or most difficult to overcome) obstacle
to that solution.
Give The Solvers another minutes to think about alternative solutions
for coping with the obstacle and to decide upon the best solution, after
which The Blockers have minutes to think of the best (most difficult)
obstacle to this proposed solution.
Continue this game until either no new blocks or no new solutions can be
formed by the respective teams. You and your co-leader will make all judg-
ments about the appropriateness/relevancy of the solutions and blocks.
In terms of keeping score, The Solvers will receivefive points for each solu-
tion they generate and The Blockers will receive five points for each
block they generate. Once no new solutions or blocks can be generated,
the game is over. The team scoring the highest number of points wins the
game (these points are used for the game only and are not to be used for
rewards or prizes). If time permits, have the teams switch roles and play
again.
172
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 184/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheetin the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets
to next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
173
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 185/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 186/289
175
Chapter 22 Session : Group Creates Videotape – Part I
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Copy of a previous group’s problem-solving video, if available
■ Videotape player/television
■ Video camera equipment
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ View and discuss problem-solving video, if available
■ Discuss video project with the group and begin planning and
organizing
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Group Leader Note:
■ The primary purpose of this session is to begin working on a
videotape, which is used for the children’s behavioral rehearsal of
choices. This process helps to consolidate the problem-solving model,
as the children are involved in writing the script for the videotape
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 187/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 188/289
we all have to work together as a team. That means we all need to
contribute to creating the script and all have to behave appropriately.
Introduce the concept of this videotape more fully by showing a sample
video from last year’s Coping Power Program, if available. If this is the first
year of the program, skip this section and move right into a discussion of
how to create the first group video.
After viewing the sample video, ask group members questions such as:
■ What was the problem in this videotape?
■
What were the solutions that they used?
■ Which was the best choice?
■ Which solutions/choices used anger control?
■ Can you think of any other choices/solutions that he could have used?
■ What would be the consequences for those solutions?
Guide the children in a discussion of the format of the video by saying the following:
Let’s think about how we are going to make our video. It is probably
best if we start out by making an introduction for the audience. This
will be the only part of the activity that we will write a script for, the
rest we will talk about and act out as we go along. In the introduc-
tion, we should tell the audience what we are doing and why we are
doing it. So, why are we making this video?
Shape/elicit a response that indicates the video will depict the social
problem-solving model, the steps that are used to cope with angry
feelings, and the best way to use coping skills when a problem occurs.
Write down the introduction that the children would like to use for the
video. It is very likely that the children will need a lot of active guidance
by you and your co-leader. Do not hesitate to provide options from
which the children can choose or provide much of the material for theintroduction. However, keep in mind that one of the goals is for the
children to feel that they created the video so be sure to solicit ideas
rather than dictate. You should have some idea of what the primary
problems for group members might be and should suggest two or three
177
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 189/289
of these as potential problems to be videotaped. Ask group members to
provide other suggestions. Write down all possible problems that are
generated and have group members select the problem they would like
to use for the videotape. Avoid using problem situations that seemunsolvable or that would not be conducive to videotaping, such as
intense physical confrontations or fighting. Appropriate situations for
the video include those that have been associated with lower to middle
ranges of anger arousal on the anger thermometer in prior group
activities.
Planning for Taping
Using the Camera
You and your co-leader need to be sure that the lighting and the area
to be used are conducive to taping. You may want to have the
children act out something so you can practice. Be careful that they do
not become overstimulated while doing this. Ask children to step in and
out of camera range so they know where they should be when carrying
out the exercise.
Assigning Roles
Determine who will present the introduction that had beendeveloped earlier (this could be a group member who cannot be
videotaped for some reason and the child can simply talk, or one
child who presents particularly well when speaking, or several group
members can present the introduction by having each child state a
portion of the introduction, etc.).
Ask group members to think about the best way to present the problem
situation for the videotaped version and record the ideas generated forthe script. Do not write a complete script but simply jot down ideas and
the actions that need to be depicted. If there is enough time, go through
a trial run without videotaping. Make the necessary adjustments and
then tape a trial run. Once the practice video has been completed,
178
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 190/289
watch the tape and ask group members: “Was the problem presented in
the best way? Is there anything you want to change about what people did
or said? Is there a better way to present the problem?”
Once the problem stem or situation has been completed, group leaders
can tie the videotaping back into perspective-taking by asking group
members what the problem is according to each person depicted in the
problem situation. If there is time, have a group member act out an
aside on the video, in which he presents verbally what the problem is
from each person’s perspective. Alternatively, the group members who
have acted out the problem situation can each act out an aside, in which
they present the problem from their perspective.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets tonext week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
179
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 191/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
180
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 192/289
181
Chapter 23 Session : Group Creates Videotape - Part II
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Practice video created last session
■ Written materials related to videotape formation
■ Videotape player/television
■ Video camera equipment
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Begin filming video—record three to four solutions to the chosen
problem
■ Depict the consequences associated with each solution on the tape
■ Set new weekly goals
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 193/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember toaward points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Continue Videotape Production
Inform group members that today’s session will be spent filming
solutions to the problem they chose last week as the focus of the video.
Review the practice tape filmed at last week’s session and let the children
know that today the group will film the final version. First, ask the chil-
dren to list diff erent solutions for the particular problem and record
responses on the dry erase board or flipchart. Provide encouragement if
needed and suggest solutions involving verbal assertion, bargaining,
compromise, and/or negotiation, if the group members do not generate
these types of solutions on their own.
Once the solutions have been identified, ask group members to decide
which solutions they would like to videotape (choose three or four), and
be sure to discuss the consequences associated with each of the chosen
solutions.
Videotape each solution (this will take the rest of this session and the
next). If desired, you may show the group the taped solution after each
enactment. One note of caution is that it is sometimes difficult to get
back to the exact point where you ended, so the final video may appear
choppy. Also, it is better to not have group members view enacted solu-
tions in which they were acting silly; this will reinforce the silliness and
will make it more difficult to complete this task. Discontinue taping if
children become silly to stop reinforcement for this type of behavior.
182
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 194/289
Following the taping/review of each solution, ask group members:
■ Was this the way we want the solution to look?
■ Is there anything we should have done di ff erently?
■ Is everyone happy with this taped solution?
Re-tape solutions until the group as a whole is satisfied with the result.
During the course of the videotape production, be sure to comment on
and reinforce children’s attempts at problem solving. For example,
group members can disagree about the wording for solutions or about
which solutions are best for videotaping. When these disagreements are
identified and resolved among group members, congratulate children
on being able to resolve problems in an appropriate manner.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter formore details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
183
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 195/289
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
184
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 196/289
185
Chapter 24 Session : Group Creates Videotape – Part III
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Practice video created last session
■ Written materials related to videotape formation
■ Videotape player/television
■ Video camera equipment
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Complete videotape production
■ Review material learned during the year
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 197/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Complete Videotape Production
Review (discuss or watch) the problem-solving videotape created last
week. Ask group members to recall other solutions they wanted to enact
and videotape, and write these on the dry erase board orfl
ipchart. Havemembers enact, record, and review the remaining solutions.
Following the taping/review of each solution, ask group members:
■ Is this the way we want the solution to look?
■ Is there anything we should have done di ff erently?
■ Is everyone happy with this taped solution?
Re-tape solutions until the group as a whole is satisfied with the result.
Once group members are satisfied with each individual solution, watch
the entire videotape. Ask group members why it was useful to develop
this videotape and what they were able to learn from this process. Also,
be sure to ask all members for consent to view the video during parent
meetings. ALL members must agree to show the tape or it cannot be shown
at all.
Again, reinforce group members’ attempts at problem solving during
the course of the videotape production.
Review Group Material and Prepare for Summer
Review with the group material from Sessions –. You may use thefollowing sample dialogue:
You all have worked very hard this year in the group meetings and
we hope you have learned a lot about coping with di ffi cult situations.
The videotape we just watched is a great demonstration of your
186
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 198/289
knowledge and coping skills. Now we would like to take an opportu-
nity to review all of the things you have learned this year. What are
some of the things that you have learned in the Coping Power group?
Encourage group members to list skills they have learned during the
first year of group. Write these on the dry erase board or flipchart as
they are generated. Make sure that the list includes the following:
■ Setting long-term goals
■ Setting short-term goals
■
Organizational skills
■ Study and homework skills
■ Identifying feelings in self
■ Identifying feelings in others
■ Recognizing triggers for various feelings
■
Being aware of physical changes in your body related to feelings
■ Calming down through deep breathing and relaxation techniques
■ Self-control and anger coping through coping statements and
other techniques (e.g., doing something else)
■ Taking others’ perspective and avoiding misunderstandings
■ Trying to understand others’ intentions to avoid problems
■ Problem solving—identifying the problem, generating choices,
and selecting the choice with the best possible consequence for
everyone involved (demonstrated wonderfully in the PICC
videotape!)
Summarize for the group by saying:
That is a lot that you have learned! Now, all you have to do is
remember these coping skills and use them. These are not just for use
at school, but can be used for all kinds of di ffi cult situations, such as
at home and in your neighborhood. Who agrees to work on using
these coping skills over the summer break? These types of coping skills
will also be useful as you start th grade and are faced with new types
187
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 199/289
of social situations and di ff erent academic demands. Once th grade
gets started, you will attend Coping Power group at your new middle
school as well (for a total of sessions in th grade). This will allow
you to learn more coping skills and learn ways to apply things youalready know, such as the PICC model, to new situations that arise
in middle school.
Encourage group members to accept the invitation to use their new cop-
ing skills throughout the summer. Answer any remaining questions about
the conclusion of the th-grade group or about next year’s th-grade
group.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
188
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 200/289
Coping Power Child Program
Year 2
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 201/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 202/289
191
Chapter 25 Session : Review From Previous Year
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Three-Strike System poster (from Session )
■ Point System poster (from Session )
■ Materials for review game (board game spinner and review questions)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review group purpose and structure
■ Review curriculum material from year one of the program
■ Reinitiate goal setting procedure
Group Leader Note:
■ This session is designed to take place at the beginning of the
student’s second year of involvement in the Coping Power Program.
In preparation for this fi rst meeting, group leaders will need
to familiarize themselves with Sessions – . It would be helpful
to have one or both group leaders meet with each student individually prior to the initial group meeting. This can serve both
to establish a relationship with the student as well as allow time
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 203/289
192
to begin formulating a list of potential goals that the student
will work on during the remainder of the program. Given that
the students have not been participating in group sessions over
the summer, one of the primary purposes of this session will be to review the content and process of the previous sessions.
In addition, review of content from Session will assist group
leaders in reestablishing the group format and structure.
Review General Purpose and Structure of the Program
Introduce yourself and your co-leader to group members and provide
a brief overview of the program to students. Also discuss time, frequency,
and number of group meetings to be held during the year. Year of the
Coping Power Program is comprised of sessions that occur once per
week, usually during the th grade.
Review the general idea regarding the purpose of this group and ask,
“Who can remember why we began meeting in this group? Why do youthink this is called the Coping Power Program?” Elicit or shape a response
that indicates that children can increase or strengthen their coping skills
in this group. It is important to convey to the group that, “We are not
trying to teach you to stop being angry, but rather to learn new ways of
responding when you are angry, so that you are making smarter choices and
think through problems when they do happen.”
Ask the students about any problems they encountered over thesummer months or since the start of school this year that led to anger
or caused a problem for them. Ask them to talk about how they coped
with these situations. Have them discuss times they were able to cope
eff ectively with problem situations and times when they were unable to
do so. See if any of them remembered to use the Problem-Solving
(PICC) model (see Session ) and pick apart the problem. Have group
members discuss situations that continue to be difficult for them, or
that continue to make them angry, and what they do when they
encounter these difficult situations. Record the students’ responses on
the dry erase board or flipchart so they can be used for the goal-setting
section of today’s session.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 204/289
Getting Acquainted/ Achieving Group Cohesion
The following activities can help the children get to know one another
and build group cohesion. Alternatively, you may choose an activity described in Session (e.g., Pass the Ball, group naming task).
Making a Flag : Have group members construct a flag with paper,
cloth, or other material. For this task, group members would first
need to decide what symbol they want on their flag, and then
work cooperatively to construct this symbol.
Interview Task : Have group members pair up and interview eachother (ask each other questions like “What is your favorite food?”
“What kinds of sports do you like?” “What are your favorite
activities?” etc.) for approximately minutes. Then, instruct them
to introduce the student they interviewed to the rest of the group.
Group Rules
Remind the children of the rules from last year’s group (see Session ).
Encourage members to come up with rules for this year. They can be
the same rules from the previous year or they can be diff erent. Have
students take turns writing down the rules on the dry erase board or
flipchart. Have all group members generate rules. If a student off ers
a “strange,” unclear, or silly rule, try to reframe this into a useful rule.
General rules for the group should include:
■ No physical contact
■ No name-calling
■ No swearing
■ Arriving on time
■ Having a positive attitude
■ Not interrupting each other
■ Keeping everything private (confidentiality)
■ Following directions
193
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 205/289
Point System
Review the procedure for earning points (see Session ). Ask the children
if they remember how they can earn points in group. Have them gener-ate responses and record them on the dry erase board or flipchart. Points
can be earned for the following:
■ point for following the rules
■ point for positive participation
■ points for completing homework assignments
■ – points for achieving weekly goals
Remember to display the point system poster from last year in a visible
space at every group meeting.
The Three-Strike System
Remind students of the three-strike system where each child is given
three chances or warnings before losing a point for not following rules
(see Session ). Be sure to display the three-strike system poster at every
session.
Positive Participation
Review with children the concept of positive participation and how
they can use it to earn points. Responding meaningfully to questions
from leaders or other group members, raising important points related
to the discussion, and engaging in activities are examples of ways
in which children can positively participate in group.
Rewards for Earning Points
Remind children that, like last year, they can use their points for certain
rewards. Children can still “buy” items from the prize box, but now that
194
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 206/289
they are in middle school, prizes will cost more than they did in the
previous year. Children can also combine their points to earn a pizza
party or other group reward at the end of the program. The reward
should be based on reaching a certain percentage (e.g., %) of the totalpossible points for the group.
Goal Setting
Review the goal-setting procedure with the group (see Session ). Ask
children if they can remember the definition of a goal and the diff erencebetween long-term and short-term goals. Have students generate long-
term goals for themselves, or ask them to decide on a goal that they
would like to work on during the course of this school year and the types
of things they might like to change in themselves through their work in
this group. Have students identify the short-term behavioral goals they
need to reach in order to achieve their chosen long-term goal and choose
one to use as their weekly goal. Like last year, children will record their
weekly goals on the goal sheets in the workbook.
Optional Review Game
This optional activity is designed to help reinforce the material covered
during year of the program. The game provides an opportunity for
group leaders to see how much information students retained fromtheir previous experience in the program. It also provides an engaging
and fun format for students to demonstrate their newly learned skills.
Have available a board game spinner with numbers on it and predeter-
mined program review questions that correspond to the numbers. Have
the children take turns spinning the game piece. Whatever number the
arrow lands on will determine the question the child will be asked.
Award one point for every correct answer. Points can be used to pur-chase prizes from the prize box, or simply be calculated as game points
to see who wins this particular game.
195
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 207/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet inthe workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
196
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 208/289
197
Chapter 26 Session : Organizational and Study Skills
Review
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Materials for optional organization and study skills activities (stop-
watch, students’ book bags, sets of words on diff erent colors of paper,
index cards listing positive and negative study skills) (see Session )
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Teach children ways they can improve their academic organizational skills
■ Review study skills for school and homework skills at home
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
Group Leader Note:
■ The primary purpose of today’s group meeting is to reintroduce and rein-
force the skills covered last year in Session (Organizational and Study
Skills). The goal will be to convey to students some appropriate study and
organizational skills that may help them achieve more in school.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 209/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember toaward points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Strategies for Achieving School Success
Introduce the topic for today by discussing the transition to middle
school and the concomitant increase in homework and study demands
that teachers may make on students. You may use the following sample
dialogue:
Now that you are in middle school there will be more expected
from you in terms of taking responsibility for your schoolwork.
There will be an increase in homework that will require you to
spend more time on your studies. In addition, teachers will be
expecting more from you both in class and in assuming more
independence in terms of completing assignments and other
schoolwork on your own. This means that you may need to
develop new skills in order to meet these new demands. What do
you think are the most important skills needed in order to do
well in school?
At this time, you may ask students if they can recall anything from the
previous session on organizational and study skills. Use the information
from Session to facilitate discussion. Be sure to reiterate how taking
greater responsibility of homework and other school assignments can
decrease frustration and help students to feel less angry in general at
school.
198
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 210/289
Organizational and Study Skills Role-Play
To illustrate the importance of good organizational and study skills, you
may wish to conduct a role-play exercise. You or your co-leader will play the role of the parent while the other acts out the part of the child. Role-
play a scene in which a parent and child are in the den watching TV.
When the show ends, the parent says, “It’s p.m. and time to go to
bed.” The child opens up his or her book bag, takes out several pieces
of crumpled paper, and says that he or she forgot about a homework
assignment that is due in the morning. The child also discovers a sci-
ence project that is due later in the week that he or she hasn’t started.The parent says to the child, “What are all these loose papers in your
book bag?” and “Where is your assignment book?” The child looks
puzzled. Parent and child sit down together to organize materials and
plan for a regular structured study schedule.
Make sure to include organizational skills, study skills, and long-term
assignment planning in your role-play. Generate discussion utilizing the
Problem-Solving (PICC) model to illustrate the objective of the session.Have students pick apart the role-play identifying the problem, choices,
and consequences.
Optional Activities
Following are a number of optional activities that can also be used to illus-
trate the importance of organization and good study skills. Repeating one
or more of the exercises from last year may be very beneficial. Choose
either an organizational or study skills activity to reinforce the objective
of this section (See Session for full instructions on games).
Book Bag Organization
As was done in Session , you can instruct the children to bring their
book bags to today’s session and conduct a contest to see who can
organize their bag the best and/or find particular items (e.g., a ruler, a
pencil, etc.) the quickest. You can use a stopwatch to time the children.
199
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 211/289
Word Organization
You may use the same words for this activity as you used last year in
Session , or you may create new ones. Provide each child with a set of words and instruct them to put the words into some sort of order.
(Children can sort words alphabetically, by color of paper, by category,
etc.) You can use the stopwatch to time the children and see who is able
to organize the words the fastest.
Home/School Study Skills
Write on the dry erase board or flipchart the following statement: “How
to study so that I can do well in school.” Create two columns labeled
home and school and solicit from group members skills they can use
and record responses under the appropriate columns.
Study Skills Index Cards
You may use the same index cards for this activity as you used last year in
Session . Provide the group with the stack of cards, which list positive and
negative study skills, and ask them to decide whether each idea would be
useful or not for studying.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
200
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 212/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter
formore details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at theend of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
Homework
✎ Ask the children to review the Study Skills at School handout in the
workbook
✎ Have each student complete and return a new Homework Contract in
the workbook (signed by both the student and parent) to the next
group session. Remind group members that they can earn extra points
for returning their homework.
201
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 213/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 214/289
203
Chapter 27 Session : Application of Social Problem
Solving to Teacher Con fl ict
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Problem-Solving Worksheet
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Enhance perspective-taking ability
■ Discuss teacher’s perspective
■ Practice problem solving with teacher conflicts
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 215/289
Check that children signed, and had their parents sign, the Homework
Contract in the workbook.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Understanding the Teacher’s Perspective
Remind group members of the interviews they did with their teachers,
and let them know that you and your co-leader have compiled the top
answers to the question, “What do you (teachers) expect from stu-
dents in the classroom?” These answers will be used to engage the chil-
dren in a game.
Divide the group in half and ask each group to come up with the top responses they think teachers gave to the question. Write the responses
generated by the group on the dry erase board or flipchart. After they
have provided their answers, discuss with the students why teachers may
have selected these specific responses and how these items may impact a
teacher in the classroom. Discuss the importance of understanding the
needs and desires of others (teachers), in order to develop and improve
relationships. (If you want, you can conduct this exercise in a “Family
Feud” game show format and have the answers already prepared on slips
of cardboard. When a student lists one of the top answers, you turn
over that slip and display the answer.)
The following top answers are actual results from surveys we con-
ducted with schoolteachers.
The top answers in our survey were:
. To be involved working and learning something.
. To be happy or excited about learning something.
. To participate.
204
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 216/289
. To be prepared and ready to work.
. To be respectful.
. To work to their best ability.
. To follow the rules.
. To be creative/have fun.
. To pay attention and understand the material.
. To seek out answers to questions they have.
If audiotapes are available from the teacher interviews conducted earlier,
you can replay portions of these interviews for the students to hear.
Use Problem-Solving (PICC) Model to Discuss Teacher Issues
Problem Identification
Have group members brainstorm about diff erences of opinion that have
occurred or could occur between a teacher and a student, as well as pos-
sible diff erences in the perspectives of teachers and students. Try to
focus this discussion on the teacher’s expectations for students in the
classroom. You may use the following sample dialogue:
What do teachers expect students to do in the classroom? If they expect
you to do your work independently, how can you ask teachers for helpwhen you need it? What do teachers expect from students in terms of
homework? You may think that homework is boring or takes away
from your free time, but your teachers probably think that homework
is a great way to help you retain what you have learned in class.
Refer children to the Problem-Solving Worksheet in their workbooks.
Ask each child to write down a problem that they have with a teacher
and use the worksheet to help generate solutions to that problem. Makesure that the form is filled out completely. You can go over this as a
group activity, or have each student complete the form independently
and review each one and assist as needed.
205
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 217/289
Consequence Evaluation
Have group members rate each consequence in terms of whether it is a
good (), okay (), or bad () consequence. Record the rating nextto each consequence.
Develop a Plan
Have group members decide what the best solution would be and
then discuss possible obstacles for that solution. Repeat until youhave discussed three or more possible solutions and their associated
obstacles.
Role-Play
Have group members role-play the problem situation and several alter-
natives. Ask each of them to choose a solution that has been rated
or and ask them to enact the solution with another group member
acting as the teacher in the role-play.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your
co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing
about themselves and/or one positive thing about another group
member.
206
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 218/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at
the end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
207
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 219/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 220/289
209
Chapter 28 Session : Application of Social Problem
Solving to Both Making Friends and Being
Friends With Others
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Audiotape recorder
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Illustrate eff ective versus ineff ective methods for joining in others’
activities
■ Have children practice joining a group and/or making new friends
■ Reinforce the positive qualities in the self that are important for join-
ing activities and being a friend
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 221/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Joining in Activities and Making New Friends
The purpose of this discussion is to introduce the importance of com-
munication when joining a new activity, and when beginning to make
friends with people that you do not know very well. For groups that aresocially skilled, start the discussion by saying:
We know that you are really good at making friends, and we want to see
the best ways you know for how to make friends. For groups that are
not as socially skilled, you may want to start by stating: It can be
easy or hard to make new friends, and we wanted to spend the fi rst part
of our group today thinking about the best ways to make friends. What
are all the ways that you can think for making new friends, or joining in with a group of kids who are already doing something together?
Suggest to group members that, as they grow older, there will be times
when they will make life changes (e.g., transition to middle school), and
they will meet many new people and will want to develop new friend-
ships. Ask group members to try to think of all possible choices or ways
to make friends. Be sure to include the following ideas:
■ Take a positive approach (e.g., smile, say “hi,” compliment others)
■ Find things that you share in common
■ Try not to be nervous
■ Make eye contact
■ Be kind
■ Be considerate of others and their feelings
■ Listen to others
■ Show an interest in other people and their families
210
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 222/289
■ Suggest doing an activity that could be done together
■ Focus on positive qualities in people
The general idea is to convey ways or skills to make friends, in general.Once this list of positive or eff ective ways of making friends has been gen-
erated, ask members to name the opposite ways of trying to make friends
for each method listed (e.g., not really listening to the other person, try-
ing too hard, not making eye contact, being too friendly or too hostile).
Role-Play
Have each group member role-play making friends. Children can use
any one of the strategies identified or one of their own. Use modeling or
feedback about the child’s portrayal of the diff erent choices/strategies, as
needed.
Positive Qualities of Self and Others
The first component of learning how to develop friendships with others
is to be able to recognize positive qualities in oneself that others would
value in a friend. Engage the children in an exercise designed to assist
them in recognizing their positive qualities that others would value. Use
the following instructions:
Now that we know the general things to do to make friends, we want
you to think about things in yourself that others would like in a
friend. What do you look for in a friend? What qualities are impor-
tant for friends?
For this activity you should have available pieces of paper that list the
diff erent characteristics that are important for friends to have. Display
each trait or characteristic as children identify them. Important charac-
teristics to include are:
■ Trustworthiness
■ Honesty
211
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 223/289
■ Respectful
■ Thoughtful
■ Good listener
These more general categories can be defined in behavioral terms for the
children as well:
■ Sharing with others
■ Keeping secrets
■
Not talking bad behind a person’s back
■ Becoming involved in things another person likes to do
If the children have difficulty generating these kinds of characteristics on
their own, feel free to display the words and ask children to identify the
behavioral characteristics of these general categories. Refer children to
the page in the workbook entitled Making Friends Is Easier if . . .
Wanted: A Good Friend
This next activity involves having each child identify the positive qual-
ities in themselves that make them a good friend to others. Ask the
students to take a few minutes and create an advertisement to sell them-
selves as friends. Instruct them to mention all the reasons they would
make good friends, including any of the qualities previously discussed.
Encourage children to also talk about the things they like to do, the
activities they enjoy (e.g., sports, clubs), their favorite singers or music
groups, their favorite foods, and anything else that describes them.
Refer children to the sample friend advertisement in the workbook
for ideas. Children will use the blank form in the workbook to create
their ads.
For groups where writing skills are an issue, you can use a tape recorder
for this exercise, but written format would provide the children with a
permanent copy of their work. Make sure to reinforce children for report-
ing positive activities they like and positive qualities about themselves.
These are important aspects of children’s identity development that
212
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 224/289
should be revisited in one-to-one sessions (see Chapter ). Ask group
members to share their advertisements with the group. Following this
exercise, it may be beneficial to discuss with group members the idea that,
even if you try all these strategies or use all the skills that were identified,it is still possible that someone will not want to be your friend. Introduce
the idea that using these skills maximizes the possibility that one will
make friends more easily, but it does not guarantee that this will happen.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
213
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 225/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 226/289
215
Chapter 29 Session : Application of Social Problem Solving
to Group Entry and Negotiation With Peers
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Ball
■ Two-person games (checkers, Connect Four, etc.)
■ Video camera equipment (optional)
■ Videotape player/television (optional)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Illustrate skills associated with successful group entry
■ Reinforce peer negotiation skills
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be used
to have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 227/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Entering an Existing Group
Role-Play
In order to convey the ideas of skills associated with successful groupentry, you and your co-leader can conduct a role-play exercise. In this
role-play you and your co-leader or other sta ff member will act out
ineff ective ways to join in with a group, and the children will be asked
to indicate what was wrong with the entry approaches. For this role-
play, enlist one of the children from group to act as part of the group to
be entered. One group leader and one child are playing catch with a
ball. The other group leader attempts to join by walking up to the two
individuals playing catch and saying loudly, “Hey! Can I play with you
guys? Can I play catch? That really looks like fun.” During this exercise the
leader playing the role of the joiner should try to stand very close to one
of the people playing catch. The group leader throwing the ball should
respond by saying, “No, we are playing together.” The person trying to
join then says quietly, “Can I play catch with you?” without looking at
either person. Again, the group leader throwing the ball should say, “We
are playing catch with each other.” The person trying to join in shouldthen say, “Well, it really looks like you are having fun playing catch. Do
you think I could play with you in a few minutes?” The other group leader
should then say, “Well, okay. How about if you give us a couple of minutes
to play together and then you can play with us?” The person approaching
then says, “I really would like to play this game with you now. Why don’t
you throw me the ball?”
Group Leader Note:
■ If the group members identi fi ed other ine ff ective or negative ways of mak-
ing friends or joining a group, you can incorporate these negative methods
into the role-play. An alternate approach to the role-play would be for the
leaders to combine the latter two communication di ffi culties and have the
216
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 228/289
person trying to join the group look down as he or she is asking to play in
a few minutes.
Following the role-play, ask group members to identify what the person
trying to join the game did wrong. Responses may include all or some
of the following:
■ Stood too close
■ Too intrusive
■ Tried to join in
■ Did not look at the people playing the game
■ Spoke too softly
■ Did not listen to what the other person said
Use the Problem-Solving (PICC) Model with children and pick apart the
problem of trying to join a group of kids who are already doing some-
thing. Ask the children to generate possible solutions (e.g., raise voice,
make eye contact) and the consequences of each of those solutions.
Negotiating With Peers
Role-Play
In order to convey to children the basic ideas related to negotiating withpeers, you and your co-leader can conduct a role-play exercise.
In this role-play exercise you and your co-leader or other sta ff member
sit down to play a two-person game (see Materials Needed section).
Leader A starts off by saying, “I want to go fi rst, so I think you should let
me.” Leader B says in response, “You always get to go fi rst. I want to go
fi rst this time.” Leader A then says, “I do not always go fi rst, and I think
that I should go fi rst this time.” Leader B does not argue at this time andLeader A starts the game. After taking a couple of turns, Leader A says
to the other, “Ha ha! I am winning! I can always play this game better
than you.” Leader B says, “No you can’t. I usually win this game, and you
do not play as well as I do.” At this point, you and your co-leader can stop
217
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 229/289
the role-play and ask group members what the problem is. After group
members have identified the problem (e.g., both people want to go first,
one person was making fun of the other because he or she was not win-
ning, one person was bragging), ask them what the two people couldhave done to avoid these problems, or how they could have helped the
game go more smoothly (e.g., flip a coin, tell other person that she can
go first and you will go first the next time, compliment the other per-
son when she makes a good move, do not brag when you have made a
good move, do not laugh at the other person).
Discuss the importance of being skilled at negotiating with peers and
being able to interact with a minimum amount of conflict. Point out
to group members that the way they interact with their friends now
will, in part, dictate how people view them, and can either help or hin-
der their ability to make friends in the future. People who are seen as
friendly, caring, easygoing, and considerate have a much easier time
making friends and getting ahead in life than do people who are incon-
siderate, mean, and unpleasant to be around. Make sure that the chil-
dren understand that this does not mean that they should act like a “pushover” and do anything that their friends want them to do because
this type of behavior would also lead to problems in the future.
Emphasize balance, as well as the ability to set appropriate limits in a
polite and respectful manner.
Optional Exercise
Place the two-person game on the table and instruct the group that they
can play the game for the next several minutes. One child should be
chosen to work with a group leader in observing and coaching the
group members. Instruct the child to give feedback to any student who
displays any of the positive behaviors listed during the game (e.g., while
the players are engaged, the coach should be actively off ering feedback
on positive/prosocial game behaviors). You can determine how capablethe child is of accurately noting these behaviors and assist him or her to
the extent needed in the observation and coaching task. Observe the
children and note how they decide who will begin to play and how they
decide to take turns at the game. Also, observe sportsmanship and how
218
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 230/289
the children respond to winning and losing. If possible, videotape this
interaction.
At the end of minutes, inform the children that their time is up. Ask
the child who was involved in the coaching to point out the behaviors
she observed and who displayed the positive or more sportsmanlike
behaviors. Then ask group members to comment on their decision-
making process by asking the following questions:
■ How did you decide who would play fi rst?
■ How did you decide who would go next?
Also ask group members to comment on their game-playing behavior.
You may ask the following:
■ Was good sportsmanship shown?
■ Is there anything that people would or could have done di ff erently to
make the game go more smoothly?
If you videotaped the process, review the tape and ask members to com-ment on their own or other group members’ behavior in terms of the
preceding questions.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with theircurrent goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
219
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 231/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep aneye out for any potential problems that may arise between group mem-
bers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem
solving.
220
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 232/289
221
Chapter 30 Session : Sibling Con fl ict and Problem
Solving
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify and discuss issues pertaining to sibling conflict
■ Role-play alternative solutions to problem situations with siblings
■ Set new weekly goals
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 233/289
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Identifying and Dealing With Sibling Conflict
Problem Identification
Ask group members to brainstorm various confl
icts that have occurredor that could occur between brothers and sisters. Choose one or two
common and solvable problems, and first engage in a discussion relat-
ed to problem definition and perspective taking by asking, “What is the
problem here?” Break the problem down into manageable steps, that is,
“I want to watch one show and my brother or sister wants to watch
another show,” rather than “My brother or sister always gets to pick the
show to watch,” or “My brother or sister can do more things than me
because he or she is older,” rather than “My parents are always giving
more to my brother or sister because they love him or her more than
me.” Use the following questions to facilitate the discussion:
■ What is the problem from your perspective?
■ What is the problem from your sibling’s perspective?
■ How can the two (or more) of you come to see the problem in the
same way?
■ How could you agree on what the problem is?
If group members have difficulty generating problems with siblings,
you can suggest one of the following sibling conflict situations.
■ Your sibling has a game that you want to use and he will not let
you use it.
■ Your sibling teases you.
■ Your sibling has borrowed something of yours and has broken it.
222
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 234/289
■ You want to use something that belongs to your sibling.
■ Your sibling has broken a rule/cheated while playing a game with
you.
■ Your sibling is refusing to take turns.
Solution Generation
Have group members brainstorm all possible choices and record these
on the Problem-Solving Worksheet in the workbook.
Consequence Generation
For each choice generated, ask group members to identify the possible
consequences for that solution and record these on the form under the
consequence section.
Consequence Evaluation
Have students indicate whether they think each consequence is good
(), okay (), or bad (). Have a group leader or a group member
record the evaluation of each consequence.
Develop a Plan
Ask group members to decide which solution would be the best to try
first, and then generate possible obstacles to that solution. Next, decide
on a backup solution and generate obstacles to that solution. Decide on
a second backup solution and continue until the group feels as though
they have used all the appropriate solutions.
223
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 235/289
Role-Play
At this point in the session you and your co-leader or other sta ff
member will role-play a sibling conflict situation. The situation caninvolve one sibling feeling jealous of what another sibling receives from
a parent. One leader states excitedly “Mom just said that I can go to the
mall with friends tonight.” The other group leader says in response,
“Mom never lets me go to the mall. They love you more than they love me.”
Ask students the following questions and instruct them to record their
responses on the Problem-Solving Worksheet:
■ What was the problem according to each child?
■ What is the real problem?
■ What are his choices in this situation?
■ What are the consequences for each solution?
■ What is the best choice?
Have students indicate whether they think each consequence is good
(), okay (), or bad (), with group leaders or a group member
recording the evaluation for each consequence.
Group Member Role-Play
Ask each group member to choose one of the choices that has received
a rating of either or and ask him or her to enact that solution
with another group member playing the role of the sibling. After each
student has enacted the chosen solution, ask the other group members
if they thought the student was able to enact the solution. Have each
student take a turn acting out a solution.
Group Leader Note:
■ It is useful to discuss the idea that di ff erent strategies will work best
with di ff erent sources of con fl ict. For example, ignoring, leaving,
distracting, or using humor are most useful when the con fl ict involves
teasing. Assertion works best if a sibling has used something without
224
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 236/289
asking, if a sibling has broken a rule/cheated, or if a sibling won’t
take turns/share. Seeking adult assistance works best if one of the
solutions has been tried and failed, or if a sibling refuses to help with
an assigned group chore. This discussion can occur following any of the objectives in this session.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet inthe workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep
an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
225
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 237/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 238/289
227
Chapter 31 Session : Application of Social Problem
Solving to Peer Pressure
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Two-person games (checkers, Connect Four, etc.)
■ Pictures (either hand-drawn or clipped from magazines, newspapers,
comics, etc.) that depict the various categories of peer pressure
(optional)
■ Slips of paper listing diff erent reasons children may give in to peer
pressure (optional)
■ Hat, box, or other container to put the slips of paper in (optional)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce peer negotiation skills
■ Illustrate and discuss peer pressure and why it works
■ Discuss ways of resisting peer pressure and sharpening refusal skills
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 239/289
Group Leader Note:
■ The homework assignment for next week is to collect pictures to make
a poster depicting peer pressure and resisting peer pressure. Prior tothis meeting, consult with the school’s principal to request permission
to hang up the poster at the school. Also, do not forget to complete the
individual meeting for this month and complete the Neighborhood
Questionnaire with each student. This questionnaire can be found at
the end of the chapter and will be used as part of the discussion for
next week’s session.
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting should
be used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
What Is Peer Pressure?
The goal of this part of the session is to define peer pressure, identify
the diff erent types of peer pressure that exist, and to talk about the
diff erent activities and/or behaviors that peers can pressure children
into. Introduce this topic by referring to a school-based substance use
prevention program, if applicable. Let the children know that this is
their chance to show how much they have learned through suchprograms.
Ask group members: “Who can tell us what peer pressure is? What does
the term peer pressure mean?” Solicit ideas from group members for a
228
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 240/289
general definition of peer pressure, with the basic idea being that
peers try to encourage you to engage in behaviors in which you are
not sure you want to engage (e.g., people try to get you to do bad
things, people try to talk you into trying something you do not know if you want to do, etc.).
Following the generation of a general definition of peer pressure, ask
group members to give diff erent reasons why children will give in to
peer pressure. Alternatively, instead of asking the children to generate
reasons, you can write the general reasons from the list that follows on
slips of paper and place them in a hat or a box. Choose a student to pick
a reason from the hat and have her call on one or two other students in
the group to act out a short skit depicting the particular reason. Repeat
this exercise until each group member has had a turn acting. Or, you
can present the children with pictures (either hand-drawn or clipped
from magazines, newspapers, comics, etc.) that depict the various
reasons for giving in to peer pressure and discuss as a group.
The basic categories of reasons for giving in to peer pressure include:
■ Group acceptance (to be accepted by a group)
■ Approval (so that other kids will like you)
■ Repetition (someone keeps bugging you until you give in)
■ Being threatened physically/socially (kids might give in because
someone threatens to hurt them if they do not do it/threatens to
tell everyone what a wimp/chicken they are)
■ Being put down (kids do not want to be teased or put down)
■ Reassurance (the other kids say that there is no way you can get
caught)
Refusal Skills
Have group members generate diff erent ways to resist peer pressure. Ask
students, “What are all the ways that you can think of for refusing peer
pressure? What can you do or say when someone is trying to get you to do
229
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 241/289
something you do not want to do?” Alternatively, instead of asking
children to generate ideas of ways to resist peer pressure, you can model
each of the refusal skills from the list that follows and ask group
members to label the type of refusal.
The general categories that should be elicited from the group members
include:
■ Say “No thanks.”
■ Broken record (“I don’t want any, I said I don’t want any, etc.”)
■
Make an excuse (“Well, I really need to get home now”)
■ Leave the situation
■ Change the subject (“What did you think of the basketball game
last night?”)
■ Make a joke
■ Act shocked (“I cannot believe you would think of asking me
that!”)
■ Flattery (“I thought you were great in the basketball game
today!”)
■ Suggest a better idea (“How about if we go shoot some baskets
instead?”)
■ Return the challenge (“Come on, you do not really mean that!
Why would you want to do that anyway?”)
■ Find other kids to hang out with
■ Try to use peer mediation
Refer children to the page in the workbook entitled, How Can I Stop
Feeling So Pressured?
Be sure to write down all the ideas that group members have on sepa-rate pieces of paper to use in next week’s session. It is not necessary for
children to identify every type of refusal skill, just as many as you feel is
appropriate.
230
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 242/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet inthe workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
231
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 243/289
NEIGHBORHOOD QUESTIONNAIRE
(Please use as a guide to your discussion during your next individual meeting)
Child’s Name: _________________
School _________________
. Describe your neighborhood for me. (Try to get an understanding for the general feel of
the neighborhood and then move on to specific questions.)
. Where do you go to have fun in your neighborhood? How do you get there?
. Do you go to community centers, churches, or other activity centers during the week? Are
these places located in your community? Do you belong to any organized teams or groups
(like scouts or church choir)? Which ones? How often do you do these kinds of things?
. Who do you like to hang out with in your neighborhood? Are they older or younger than
you? What do you do together? How do you make new friends or meet people in your
neighborhood?
. What kinds of things go on in your neighborhood? Are there places in your neighborhood
that you don’t feel safe? What makes you feel unsafe? (Note: Probe for violence, drug
use/sale, and other illegal activities if you consider it to be appropriate.)
. Are there groups of kids in your neighborhood who get in trouble? Do you hang out with
this group?
. Are there groups of kids in your neighborhood who don’t get in trouble? Do you hang out with this group?
. What do you like best about your community?
232
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 244/289
233
Chapter 32 Session : Refusal Skills
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Slips of paper listing diff erent types of refusal skills (optional)
■ Hat, box, or other container to put the slips of paper in (optional)
■ Board game spinner (optional)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce idea of the diff iculty handling peer pressure in groups
■ Role-play refusal skills
■ Role-play use of refusal skills when faced with peer pressure
■ Begin consideration for poster depicting avoidance of peer pressure
and related problems
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 245/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from the
previous group session. The review section of each meeting should be usedto have group members recall the primary message from the previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Influence of Peer Pressure
Group Leader Note:
■ Prior to today’s session, you should recruit a group member to help
you with the following exercise. Be sure to choose a student who is in fl uential with the other children.
Begin this portion of the session by engaging children in an exercise that
illustrates the influence of peer pressure. Draw three diff erent lines, all
of the exact same length, in diff erent orientations or on diff erent places
on the dry erase board or flipchart. After the three lines are drawn, ask
group members, “Which line is longer?” The child you chose as a helper
should do his best to convince the group that one of the lines is longerthan the others, even though that is not the case. He should try to exert
influence over the other children.
Following this activity, ask group members the following questions:
■ How did you decide which line was longer?
■ Did anything help you to make up your mind?
■ Did you decide to go along with the other group members in the deci-
sion or did you stick to your original idea?
■ How did it feel to have someone try to convince you that your view-
point was not right?
234
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 246/289
■ Is it more di ff icult to resist peer pressure if this occurs when a group of
kids is around?
Have a general discussion about how it can be diff icult to maintain your
point of view in the face of peer pressure.
Practice Using Refusal Skills
The goal of this exercise is to have each group member role-play at
least one and possibly two ways to refuse peer pressure (see Session
for a list of refusal skills). You may choose from the following options.
. Have each group member choose two or three of the refusal skills
that they believe would work best for them. Each group member
then role-plays these refusal skills in the face of pressure from
another group member (or group leader).
. Write refusal skills on separate slips of paper (you may have done
this already last week), fold them, and place them in a containerso that the group members cannot see what is written on them.
Each child chooses one refusal skill and then they role-play using
this skill in a peer pressure situation. Another group member (or
group members) and/or group leader tries to pressure him or her
to do something. The group members watching the role-play try
to guess what skill is being depicted.
. Use a board game spinner with numbers on it. Assign a refusalskill to each number and instruct the students to take turns
spinning the game piece. Each group member then role-plays
the refusal skill represented by the number spun in the face of
pressure from either you or the other members of the group.
Role-Play Use of Refusal Skills During Peer Pressure
The purpose of this activity is to role-play peer pressure. Have one child
or group leader leave the room. The remaining people should decide on
a situation or activity they want the person who left the room to engage
in when he or she comes back in. Try to get the group to generate their
235
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 247/289
own ideas (e.g., examples include erasing something important off the
teacher’s board, taking someone’s pencil without asking). Instruct the
students to try as hard as they can to get the person to do what they
want. Instruct the person entering the room to try to resist the pressureusing the refusal skills they had identified as skills that would work best
for them. Be sure to coach this child and help him to recall and use
these strategies, using prompts when needed. Following this role-play,
ask group members questions such as:
■ How did the group try to pressure _____?
■
What did they do or say?
■ How did the other person try to resist the pressure?
■ What did he do or say?
■ How did it feel to be pressured?
■ How did it feel to be the person doing the pressuring?
Open up discussion of real-life experiences with peer pressure. Ask eachmember to volunteer examples of times they have been successful at
using refusal skills and times when they were unsuccessful. It may be
helpful to provide your own real-life experiences and the outcome of
both successes and failures.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your
co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
236
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 248/289
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
Homework
✎ Instruct group members to begin collecting pictures from magazines,
newspapers, or other sources that depict peer pressure, ways to avoid
peer pressure, and ways to avoid other problems that children
encounter. If they want to draw something that reflects this theme,
that would also be fine. The clippings/artwork will be used to create a
poster that will be displayed somewhere in the school. This poster will
be created during Session and displayed for two weeks or more.
Remember to award two points to each child for bringing in clippingsfor the next two weeks. If available, show children an example of a
poster to help the group conceptualize what they will be doing.
237
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 249/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 250/289
239
Chapter 33 Session : Problem Solving About Neighborhood Problems, Deviant Peer Groups,
and Centrality of Group Membership
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Diff erent sizes/colors of paper circles (optional)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Problem solve neighborhood problems using the PICC Model
■ Identify groups of children who do things together or who hang out
together
■ Identify groups of children who get in trouble together and those who
do not get in trouble
■ Reinforce the idea of defining group membership
■ Set new weekly goals
■ Assign homework
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 251/289
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Check that children have begun collecting pictures that depict peer pres-
sure. Remember to award two points to children who return homework.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Group Leader Note:
■ Prior to this session, you should meet with each child in the group
individually to interview her about the neighborhood in which she lives and complete the Neighborhood Questionnaire (see previous
session). Be sure to meet with your co-leader(s), if you have any, to
discuss the completed questionnaires.
Our Neighborhoods
This portion of the session is based on the individual interviews you
conducted with group members. The main theme to keep in mind is
that you want to talk about how to deal with peer pressure, deviant peer
groups, and dangerous situations within the neighborhood environ-
ment. If the neighborhoods appear to be safe, discuss the issue using
hypothetical situations that provide some enticement or temptation.
You may use the following sample dialogue:
As you may remember, we met with each of you to talk about issues
in your neighborhood. We have looked at some of the answers you
gave us to the neighborhood questionnaire and wanted to talk about
these questions and your answers. Many of you indicated that _____
is a problem in your neighborhood. What are the ways that you try to
240
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 252/289
cope with this problem? Are there any other ways you can try to cope
with this problem? If appropriate, you may want to focus speci fi cally
on peer pressure. All of you may experience peers pressuring you or
tempting you to become involved in activities in which you may not want to be involved. What are some of the possible things people
could try to pressure you to do?
Refer the children to the Problem-Solving Worksheet in their work-
books. Choose one community problem mentioned during the dis-
cussion and have the students complete the worksheet using the
PICC model. Examples of questions that may get group members
thinking are:
■ What are all the di ff erent ways that this problem could be coped with
or handled?
■ Are there any adults who could be consulted if this problem really
occurred?
■ Are there any other places or people in the neighborhood or communi-
ty who could help you handle this problem?
It may be useful to raise the issue that diff erent types of solutions are
more or less appropriate depending on the situation (e.g., neighbor-
hood versus the school). Ask group members to brainstorm diff erent
strategies that they think might work in the neighborhood and, after
the list has been generated, ask the group members to rate each conse-
quence as either good (), okay (), or bad ().
Assessment of Cliques/Clubs/Groups at School
Group Leader Note:
■ If you or your co-leader is based at the school where the Coping Power
Program is being conducted, it would be helpful to try to identify the
di ff erent groups of children who hang out together at the school and to
identify some relevant characteristics of these groups. This information
can then be used for facilitating the following discussion with group
members if they appear to be having di ffi culty identifying groups at
their school.
241
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 253/289
The purpose of this exercise is to assist group members with defining
diff erent types of groups and the characteristics of the diff erent
groups at school. One of the functions of this exercise is to begin
having children identify the diff erent groups that they could becomeinvolved in, and the groups that could have a positive influence on
them. You may use the following sample dialogue to introduce the
exercise:
Today we wanted to talk about the di ff erent kids you hang out with
at school and to what kinds of groups kids at your school belong. We
already talked about some of the groups and some of the pressures that
you experience in your neighborhood. Now, we want to focus on the
people and groups of people who hang out together at school. Who are
the kids you like to hang out with? Who would you choose to play
with or eat with or talk to?
Once group members have identified the children they prefer to be
around, ask them to think about groups of children who prefer to be
together. Ask, “Are there groups of kids that you like to hang out with?
Are there other groups of kids who hang out together?” Write these names
on the flipchart, leaving room next to each group or each group of
names. Then ask group members: “What do these kids do together?
What are any other characteristics you can think of for this group of kids?
What would be a good nickname for this group? Which of these groups of
kids do things that get them into trouble, and which groups of kids stay
out of trouble?” Write down the characteristics, nicknames, and
whether the children get into trouble or not next to each group. Oncethe diff erent groups have been identified, ask members to identify the
groups they belong to.
Identification of Children’s Group Membership and Group Status
The purpose of this exercise is to have a diff erent method for group
members to define the groups to which they belong. Provide group
members with diff erent sizes/colors of paper circles and ask them to
identify what groups they see themselves as members of. Use the
diff erent types of groups generated previously as a guide for this activity.
242
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 254/289
Ask them to use a diff erent circle to represent each group to which they
belong, with the largest circle representing the group that is most impor-
tant to them and so on. Write the name of the group in the middle of
each circle. Once they have identified all groups they see themselves asmembers of, each individual group member can glue/staple/tape their
circles onto a piece of paper, overlapping the circles if there is some over-
lap in group membership. This can also be a discussion achieved through
with group members verbally indicating where overlap occurs. In fact,
this entire objective can be accomplished a through discussion, where
each group member verbally recognizes the diff erent groups he feels he
is a member of, how important these groups are to him, and where over-laps in membership exist.
An alternative approach to this activity is to have each student represent
his group by wearing or holding a sign that identifies it. Each child can
relate what groups he is a member of and the people representing these
groups can stand in diff erent locations in the room. The child who is
identifying his own group membership can then stand close to or far
away from each person to indicate his status/placement within eachgroup.
The final concept to convey in today’s session is about the diff erences
between being a main part of a group versus being on the edge of the
group. You may use the following sample dialogue:
In all groups, there are people who are at the core of the group or
people who are the main members, and there are people who belong
to the group but are more on the edge of the group and not really a
main member. If you were in the middle of a group you would be
involved in almost everything the group does. If you are toward the
edge of the group, you would do only some of the things the group
does. These can be thought of as di ff erent places within the group,
and all places within a group are important places. Are there any
other ways you can tell what place or position a person has in a
group?
For each of the groups that you feel you are a member of, do you see
yourself as a primary or main member, or do you feel you are more on
the edge of the group? If you are not a part of a group and want to be,
243
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 255/289
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 256/289
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet inthe workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keepan eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group
members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice prob-
lem solving.
Homework
✎ Instruct group members to continue collecting pictures for the peer
pressure poster and to bring all their pictures to next week’s session.
245
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 257/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 258/289
247
Chapter 34 Session 32: Group Creates Peer Pressure Poster
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Peer pressure pictures or drawings collected by group members
■ Poster materials (construction paper, markers, stickers, glue, and tape)
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session and homework
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce public commitment to the use of refusal skills by having
children complete the peer pressure poster
■ Set new weekly goals
Group Leader Note:
■ A few weeks ago, group members were introduced to the idea of
creating a poster to display at their school to assist other children
with resisting peer pressure. You should come to today’s session
prepared with a series of peer pressure-related pictures, in case children did not complete the homework assignment to bring
pictures of their own. Children can use these pictures, as well as
the supplemental craft materials (e.g., markers, stickers) to create
the poster.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 259/289
Review Previous Session and Homework
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Check that children have brought their pictures for the peer pressure
poster. Remember to award two points to children who completed this
assignment.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember to
award points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Create Peer Pressure Poster to Display in School
Work with the children to create a poster about peer pressure. You may
use the following sample dialogue to facilitate the activity:
Remember that one of the problems we have been talking about in
group is related to peers pressuring kids to do things they might not
want to do. We think this is a problem that all kids experience at one
time or another, whether in school or in the neighborhood. We want you to create a poster that might help other kids in your school think
about di ff erent ways to cope with peer pressure. This way you can share
your ideas with the other kids with the hope that these ideas will help
them to refuse to succumb to the pressures of their friends. We can
organize the magazine pictures we have collected, or we have some
paper and markers if you want to use them to write words or draw pic-
tures. We do not have much time to complete this poster, so let’s work
really hard to get this done during this session. Here are the ideas from
last week for how we could organize the poster. After we have complet-
ed the poster, I will have it laminated and will bring it back to hang
somewhere in the school.
248
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 260/289
Allow group members to work on this project for the remainder of the
session. Provide instruction and help if necessary. Ask group members
to decide on a prominent place to display the poster.
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselves
and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if
applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at the
end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to keep an
eye out for any potential problems that may arise between group mem-
bers during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice problem
solving.
249
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 261/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 262/289
251
Chapter 35 Session : Positive Quality Development
and Peer Relationships
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Identify personal strengths and how these strengths help when joining
in positive peer activities and groups
■ Describe good leadership qualities and identify specific qualities for
group members to further develop
■ Set new weekly goals
Group Leader Note:
■ Prior to this session, you should have received permission to hang the
group’s peer pressure poster in a location at the school and should have
done so. If the group has not seen the poster hanging on the wall, take
them to it at the end of the session.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 263/289
Review Previous Session
Begin the group session by asking each child to recall one point from
the previous group session. The review section of each meeting shouldbe used to have group members recall the primary message from the
previous week.
Review Weekly Goal Sheets
Check that children completed their weekly goal sheets. Remember toaward points to children who successfully achieved their goal.
Strength Bombardment
Ask the children to turn to the Strength Bombardment worksheet in
their workbooks. Ask each group member to write down their
strengths, positive qualities, or interests on the circles. Once each child
has completed his bull’s-eye, he can share it with the rest of the group.
At this point, the group is expected to “bombard” this member with
other positive attributes of himself that he may have overlooked.
Instruct the member who is being “bombarded” to write down some of
the diff erent strengths that other people suggested.
The goal of this section is to get the children to think about ways they
can become members of a positive peer group. Encourage them to come
up with strategies for joining groups of people with similar interests and
goals. You may use the following sample dialogue:
Remember a couple of weeks ago we talked about di ff erent groups of
people and asked each of you which groups you were a member of?
Wait for the group to respond. Today we want you to think about
some of the groups you might want to join or for which you may
want to become more of a central member. What kinds of things do
you need to think about in order to do this?
■ Are their interests similar to yours?
■ Are their long-term goals similar to yours?
252
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 264/289
■ What are the strengths you have that you can use to try to join a
group?
■
How can you become a more central member to this group? ■ How can you show other kids the strengths you have?
■ What kind of help might you need to get started in this group?
■ What kind of help might you need to stay involved in this
group?
Positive Quality Development
Ask the children to think about other kids who are well-liked, who are
good leaders, or who are central figures in their respective groups and
what qualities these kids have.
Encourage group members to brainstorm many possible positive quali-
ties that good leaders/well-liked children/central group members have. Write these qualities on the dry erase board or flipchart.
Once a list has been generated, ask group members to choose one or
more of those qualities that they would like to develop in themselves.
Group members can then role-play a situation (e.g., trying to join a
group of children who are playing kick ball at school; starting a new
social club or team sport after school, such as Boy Scouts or baseball or
Girl Scouts or softball) and act as if they had these qualities. Following the role-play, ask the group member: “How did it feel to act as though
you were _____? What did you do di ff erently in this role-play than you do
in real life? Do you think you could act as though you had these qualities
when you are with a group of kids at school?”
Set Weekly Goals
Remind each student to set a new weekly goal (or continue with their
current goal if it has yet to be achieved) and complete the goal sheet in
the workbook. Remind the children to bring their signed goal sheets to
next week’s session.
253
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 265/289
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-leader
will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about themselvesand/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
Free Time
If time permits, allow children a free-play period of – minutes at
the end of the session (see Chapter for more details). Remember to
keep an eye out for any potential problems that may arise between
group members during this time and use it as an opportunity to practice
problem solving.
254
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 266/289
255
Chapter 36 Session : Review and Termination
of the Coping Power Program
Materials Needed
■ Dry erase board or flipchart and markers
■ Board game spinner
■ Program review questions
■ Certificates of completion
■ Prize box
Outline
■ Review previous session
■ Review weekly goal sheets
■ Reinforce group members’ positive influences on others
■ Reinforce pubic commitment to use refusal skills and the idea of
being a positive influence on other children in school by displaying
the peer pressure poster
■ Plan for the end of the year party
■ Review the program and hand out certificates of completion
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 267/289
Group Leader Note:
■ This is the fi nal “working” session for the year. Prior to today’s
meeting, you should have prepared a number of questions about the Coping Power Program to use in a review exercise with the
group (see end of chapter for sample questions).
Continuing Positive Quality Development
Ask each student to share with the group ways that they have been a
positive role model for other children at school or ways that they have
helped other children out this past semester. You can also ask each
group member to identify the qualities they currently have that make
them a good leader/positive role model for other children.
Final Review/Termination
This session is designed to serve as a final review for group members, as
well as a forum for sharing feelings related to termination. The review
element of the session is best achieved by playing a game. Use your own
questions or the ones provided at the end of the chapter and engage the
children in a review of the Coping Power Program. You may use the
following sample dialogue:
We have created a game for you to play during this last sessiontogether. Each of you will take turns spinning this game piece.
Whatever number you land on will determine what question you
will be asked. For every question you get right, you will receive one
game point. Let’s see how many points we can earn as a group!
Points earned during the game can be used to purchase prizes from the
box or can simply be calculated as game points to see who wins this
particular game.
Begin this activity by commenting on the things that you remember
from group and on each child’s progress over the course of the year. Also
share your feelings of loss that are associated with the group no longer
meeting and talk about the things you will remember from the group,
256
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 268/289
and what memories you will keep with you. Emphasize that although
the group is ending, you will always have your memories of the group.
Ask each group member to share his memories of the group and the
activities he will always remember. You can also ask group members toshare their feelings related to the loss of the group.
Planning for the End of the Year Party
The purpose of throwing a celebration at the end of the year is to
reward all group members for their eff
orts and to end the year on a positive note. Ask the group members what type of food they would
like to eat at the party next week (e.g., pizza, ice cream, cake, etc.) and
what kind of activities they would like to have planned. If there is an
opportunity for recreational activity in the school gym or field, it may
be possible to play a game of basketball, touch football, or soccer. Board
games are also good ways to engage the children in fun activities.
Before closing the session, hand out certifi
cates of completion to allgroup members and congratulate them for completing the Coping
Power Program successfully.
Positive Feedback
As outlined in Chapter , at the end of each session you and your co-
leader will ask all group members to identify one positive thing about
themselves and/or one positive thing about another group member.
Prize Box
Remember, children can earn points during group (see Chapter for
more details). Tally the points earned for each child and award prizes, if applicable.
257
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 269/289
Sample Review Questions
■ What is a “coping statement” you can say to yourself to keep from
being angry?
■ Tell about a weekly goal that you were proud of ? Why?
■ What qualities do you look for in a friend?
■ How can you tell what someone else is feeling?
■ What problem situation did we portray in the PICC video?
■ What did you learn from bringing your book bags to group and
sorting the diff erent colored word cards?
■ Name two things that you can do if you don’t understand some-
thing in class.
■ Tell us three good ways to make a new friend.
■ What is “self-talk”?
■ Tell us one thing that you can do to resist peer pressure.
■ Tell us one good thing to do when you are playing a game with
other kids.
■ What is a barrier?
■ Tell us at least two positive qualities about yourself.
■ When you want to say “no” you can . . . ?
■ Name one reason kids might give in to peer pressure.
■ Give yourself a compliment.
■ Give an example of a coping statement.
■ What makes you feel scared?
■ What behaviors do you show when you are happy?
■ What is another word for “sad”?
■ What makes you feel sad?
258
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 270/289
■ Name one thing you learned about the teacher you interviewed.
■ Name one of our group rules.
■ What behaviors do you show when you are sad?
■ What did you learn from the puppet activity?
■ Give a compliment to a group member.
■ What behaviors do you show when you are angry?
■ What is another word for “angry”?
■ What is another word for “happy”?
■ What is a “consequence”?
■ What is a short-term goal?
■ What are three things teachers expect from students?
■ When is it a bad time to try to talk to another person about a
problem?
■ Tell us at least three good solutions to this problem: You want to
watch TV and your brother wants to play a video game (you have
only one TV).
■ Tell us one group that you want to belong to in the future and if
being in this group is a “good” thing or “bad” thing for you.
Why?
■ What is one way that you can show other kids that you are an
independent person who thinks for yourself ?
■ What is a long-term goal?
■ When is it a good time to approach another person to discuss a
problem?
■ What can you do if you set a goal that is too high for yourself ?
■ What is the name of the problem-solving model we have learned
during group?
■ What did you learn from “ The Wise Men and the _____” story?
259
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 271/289
■ Tell us one reason why someone may laugh as you walk past them.
■ Tell us one good solution to this problem: a kid makes fun of
your new haircut.
■ Tell us one good way to enter a positive peer group.
■ What is something you can say to yourself to keep calm?
■ Tell us one reason why kids sometimes give in to peer pressure.
■ Name one item that the group decided not to throw overboard
during the Trouble at Sea activity.
■ What does perspective taking mean?
■ What did we practice doing using the puppets?
■ Name one item the group threw overboard during the Trouble at
Sea activity.
■ What feeling(s) is (are) hard for you to express and why?
■ When is a bad time to approach someone to talk about a problem?
■ What did the six blind men argue about in the story “The Wise
Men and the _____”?
■ Why do we set goals for ourselves?
■ What can you do or say when someone is trying to get you to do
something you do not want to do?
■ Tell us a solution to this problem: Your mom wants you to clean
your room and do the laundry but you have been invited to your
friend’s house (and you want to go).
■ What would you use the “broken record” technique for?
■ What was a good solution to the problem portrayed in the PICC
video?
■ What is something you should avoid when trying to talk to
another person about a problem?
■ Does everyone always see a problem the same way? Why or why
not?
260
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 272/289
261
Chapter 37 End of the Year Party
Materials Needed
■ Party supplies: food, drinks, plates, cups, utensils, napkins, etc.
■ Games for children to play
Outline
■ Have fun!
Group Leader Note:
■ Remember to bring food, beverage, and whatever is necessary to have
fun with your group members. Plan to play sports or games following
the lunch party and thank all group members for participating in the
program and wish them well in the future.
Ending the Year on a Positive Note
Provide a meal for the group and congratulate them on successfully
completing the Coping Power Program. Allow the children to play
games and participate in fun group activities. Talk to them about their
plans for the summer and their feelings about transitioning to middle
school. The goal of this final group meeting is simply to have fun and
make sure that everyone has a good time.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 273/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 274/289
263
References
American Psychiatric Association. (). Diagnostic and statistical manual
of mental disorders (th ed., Text Revision). Washington, DC: AmericanPsychiatric Press.
Arseneault, L., Tremblay, R. E., Boulerice, B., & Saucier, J. F. ().
Obstetric complications and adolescent violent behaviors: Testing two
developmental pathways. Child Development, , –.
August, G. J., Hektner, J. M., Egan, E. A., Realmuto, G. M., &
Bloomquist, M. L. (). The early risers longitudinal prevention
trial: Examination of -year outcomes in aggressive children with
intent-to-treat and as-intended analyses. Psychology of Addictive
Behaviors, , –.
Baden, A. D., & Howe, G. W. (). Mothers’ attributions and expectan-
cies regarding their conduct-disordered children. Journal of Abnormal
Child Psychology, , –.
Barry, C. T., Frick, P. J., DeShazo, T. M., McCoy, M., Ellis, M. E., &
Loney, B. R. (). The importance of callous-unemotional traits for
extending the concept of psychopathy to children. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, , –.
Barry, T. D., Dunlap, S. T., Cotton, S. J., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C.
(). The influence of maternal stress and distress on disruptive
behavior problems in children. Journal of the American Academy of
Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.
Barry, T. D., Dunlap, S., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (in press).
Inconsistent discipline as a mediator between maternal distress and
aggression in boys. Child and Family Behavior Therapy.
Barry, T. D., Thompson, A., Barry, C. T., Lochman, J. E., Adler, K., &
Hill, K. (). The importance of narcissism in predicting proactive
and reactive aggression in moderately to highly aggressive children.
Aggressive Behavior, , –.
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 275/289
Barth, J. M., Dunlap, S. T., Dane, H., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C.
(). Classroom environment influences on aggression, peer rela-
tions, and academic focus. Journal of School Psychology, , –.
Boxmeyer, C. L., Lochman, J. E., Powell, N., Yaros, A., & Wojnaroski, M.(). A case study of the Coping Power Program for angry and
aggressive youth. Journal of Contemporary Psychotherapy, , –.
Brennan, P. A., Grekin, E. R., & Mednick, S. A. (). Maternal smoking
during pregnancy and adult male criminal outcomes. Archives of
General Psychiatry, , –.
Brestan, E. V., & Eyberg, S. M. (). Eff ective psychosocial treatment of
conduct-disordered children and adolescents: years, studies, and
, kids. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, , –.Brinkmeyer, M. Y., & Eyberg, S. M. (). Parent-Child Interaction
Therapy for oppositional children. In A. E. Kazdin & J. R. Weisz
(Eds.), Evidence-Based Psychotherapies for Children and Adolescents
(pp. –). New York: Guilford Press.
Bry, B. H., Catalano, R. F., Kumpfer, K., Lochman, J. E., & Szapocznik, J.
(). Scientific findings from family prevention intervention research.
In R. Ashery (Ed.), Family-based prevention interventions. (pp. –).
Rockville, MD: National Institute of Drug Abuse.Caspi, A., McClay, J., Moffitt, T., Mill, J., Martin, J., Craig, I. W., Taylor,
A., & Poulton, R. (). Role of genotype in the cycle of violence in
maltreated children. Science, , –.
Cillessen, A. H., Van IJzendoorn, H. W., Van Lieshout, C. F., & Hartup,
W. W. (). Heterogeneity among peer-rejected boys: Subtypes and
stabilities. Child Development, , –.
Cleckley, H. (). The mask of insanity (th ed.). St Louis, MO: Mosby.
Colder, C. R., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (). The moderating eff ects of children’s fear and activity level on relations between parent-
ing practices and childhood symptomatology. Journal of Abnormal
Child Psychology, , –.
Colder, C. R., Mott, J., Levy, S., & Flay, B. (). The relation of per-
ceived neighborhood danger to childhood aggression: A test of medi-
ating mechanisms. American Journal of Community Psychology, ,
–.
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). Initial impact of theFast Track prevention trial for conduct problems: I. The high-risk
sample. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). Evaluation of the
first three years of the Fast Track prevention trial with children at high
264
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 276/289
risk of adolescent conduct problems. Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology, , –.
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). The eff ects of the
Fast Track program on serious problem outcomes at the end of ele-mentary school. Journal of Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology, ,
–.
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). The Fast Track
experiment: Translating the developmental model into a prevention
design. In J. B. Kupersmidt & K. A. Dodge (Eds.), Children’s peer rela-
tions: From development to intervention (pp. –). Washington,
DC: American Psychological Association.
Coon, H., Carey, G., Corley, R., & Fulker, D. W. (). Identifying chil-dren in the Colorado adoption project at risk for conduct disorder.
Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, ,
–.
Crick, N. R., & Werner, N. E. (). Response decision processes in rela-
tional and overt aggression. Child Development, , –.
Dabbs, J. M., & Morris, R. (). Testosterone, social class, and antisocial
behavior in a sample of , men. Psychological Science, , –.
Dadds, M. R. & Powell, M. B. (). The relationship of interparentalconflict and global marital adjustment to aggression, anxiety, and
immaturity in aggressive and nonclinic children. Journal of Abnormal
Child Psychology, , –.
Delaney-Black, V., Covington, C., Templin, T., Ager, J., Nordstrom-Klee,
B., Martier, S., Leddick, L., Czerwinski, R. H., & Sokol, R. J. ().
Teacher-assessed behavior of children prenatally exposed to cocaine.
Pediatrics, , –.
Dishion, T. J., & Andrews, D. W. (). Preventing escalation in problembehavior with high-risk adolescents: Immediate and -year outcomes.
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Dishion, T. J., Andrews, D. W., & Crosby, L. (). Antisocial boys and
their friends in early adolescence: Relationship characteristics, quality,
and interactional process. Child Development, , –.
Dishion, T. J. & Andrews, D. W. (). Preventing escalation in problem
behaviors with high-risk young adolescents: Immediate and year
outcomes. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.Dishion, T. J., Eddy, J. M., Haas, E., Li, F., & Spracklen, K. ().
Friendships and violent behavior during adolescence. Social
Development, , –.
265
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 277/289
Dix, T. & Lochman, J. E. (). Social cognition and negative reactions to
children: A comparison of mothers of aggressive and nonaggressive
boys. Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Dodge, K. A., Dishion, T. J., & Lansford, J. E. (). Deviant peer influ-ences in programs for youth. New York: Guilford Press.
Dodge, K. A., Laird, R., Lochman, J. E., Zelli, A., & Conduct Problems
Prevention Research Group (). Multi-dimensional latent construct
analysis of children’s social information processing patterns:
Correlations with aggressive behavior problems. Psychological
Assessment, , –.
Dodge, K. A., Lochman, J. E., Harnish, J. D., Bates, J. E., & Pettit, G. S.
(). Reactive and proactive aggression in school children andpsychiatrically impaired chronically assaultive youth. Journal of
Abnormal Psychology, , –.
Dodge, K. A., Pettit, G. S., & Bates, J. E. (). Socialization mediators
of the relation between socioeconomic status and child conduct prob-
lems. Child Development, , –.
Dodge, K. A., Pettit, G. S., McClaskey, C. L., & Brown, M. M. ().
Social competence in children. Monographs of the Society for Research in
Child Development, , –.Dunn, S. E., Lochman, J. E., & Colder, C. R. (). Social problem-
solving skills in boys with conduct and oppositional disorders.
Aggressive Behavior, , –.
Erath, S. A., Bierman, K. L., & Conduct Problems Prevention Research
Group. (in press). Aggressive marital conflict, maternal harsh punish-
ment, and child aggressive-disruptive behavior: Evidence for direct and
indirect relations. Journal of Family Psychology .
Farrington, D. P. (). Understanding and preventing bullying. In M.Tonry (Ed.), Crime and Justice (Vol. , pp. –). Chicago:
University of Chicago Press.
Fisher, P. A., & Chamberlain, P. (). Multidimensional Treatment Foster
Care: A program for intensive parenting, family support, and skill
building. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral Disorders, , –.
Fite, P. J., Colder, C. R., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (). The mutual
influence of parenting and boys’ externalizing behavior problems. Journal
of Applied Developmental Psychology, , –.Forehand, R., Sturgis, E. T., McMahon, R. J., Aguar, D., Green, K.,
Wells, K. & Breiner, J. (). Parent behavioral training to modify
child noncompliance: Treatment generalization across time and from
home to school. Behavior Modi fi cation, , –.
266
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 278/289
Gouze, K. R. (). Attention and social problem solving as correlates of
aggression in preschool males. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, ,
–.
Greenberg, M. T., Domitrovich, C., & Bumbarger, B. (). The preven-tion of mental disorders in school-aged children: Current state of the
field. Prevention and Treatment, , Available on the World Wide Web:
http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume/prea.html
Greenberg, M. T., Lengua, L. J., Coie, J. D., Pinderhughes, E. E. &
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). Predicting
developmental outcomes at school entry using a multiple-risk model:
Four American communities. Developmental Psychology, , –.
Guerra, N. G., Huesmann, L. R., & Spindler, A. (). Community violence exposure, social cognition, and aggression among urban
elementary school children. Child Development, , –.
Guerra, N. G., Huesmann, L. R., Tolan, P. H., VanAcker, R., & Eron, L. D.
(). Stressful events and individual beliefs as correlates of economic
disadvantage and aggression among urban children. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Haapasalo, J., & Tremblay, R. (). Physically aggressive boys from ages
to : Family background, parenting behavior, and prediction of delinquency. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, ,
–.
Hart, R. D., & Hare, R. D. (). Psychopathy: Assessment and associa-
tion with criminal conduct. In D. M. Stoff , J. Breiling, & J. D. Maser
(Eds.), Handbook of antisocial behavior (pp. –). New York: Wiley.
Henggler, S. W., Melton, G. B., & Smith, L. A. (). Family preservation
using multisystemic therapy: An eff ective alternative to incarcerating
serious juvenile off enders. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology,, –.
Hill, L. G., Lochman, J. E., Coie, J. D., Greenberg, M. T., & Conduct
Problems Prevention Research Group (). Eff ectiveness of early
screening for externalizing problems: Issues of screening accuracy and
utility. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Hill, L. G., Lochman, J. E., Coie, J. D., Greenberg, M. T., & Conduct
Problems Prevention Research Group (). Eff ectiveness of early
screening for externalizing problems: Issues of screening accuracy andutility. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Hinshaw, S. P., Lahey, B. B., & Hart, E. L. (). Issues of taxonomy and
comorbidity in the development of conduct disorder. Development
and Psychopathology, , –.
267
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 279/289
Hinshaw, S. P., & Lee, S. S. (). Conduct and Oppositional Defiant
Disorders. In E. J. Mash & R. A. Barkley (Eds.), Child Psychopathology
(nd ed., pp. –). New York: Guilford Press.
Ingoldsby, E. M. & Shaw, D. S. (). Neighborhood contextual factorsand early-starting antisocial pathways. Clinical Child and Family
Psychology Review, , –.
Ireland, J. L. & Archer, J. (). Association between measures of aggres-
sion and bullying among juvenile and young off enders. Aggressive
Behavior, , –.
Jackson, M. F., Barth, J. M., Powell. N., & Lochman, J. E. ().
Classroom contextual eff ects of race on children’s peer nominations.
Child Development, , –. Joff e, R. D., Dobson, K. S., Fine, S., Marriage, K., & Haley, G. ().
Social problem-solving in depressed, conduct-disordered, and
normal adolescents. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology ,
–.
Kazdin, A. E., Siegel, T., & Bass, D (). Cognitive problem-solving skills
training and parent management training in the treatment of antiso-
cial behavior in children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology ,
, –.Kellam, S. G., Ling, X., Mersica, R., Brown, C. H., & Ialongo, N. ().
The eff ect of the level of aggression in the first grade classroom on the
course of malleability of aggressive behavior into middle school.
Development and Psychopathology, , –.
Kelly, J. J., Davis, P. O., & Henschke, P. N. (). The drug epidemic:
Eff ects on newborn infants and health resource consumption at a
tertiary perinatal centre. Pediatric Child Health, , –.
Klein, N. C., Alexander, J. F., & Parsons, B. V. (). Impact of family sys-tems intervention on recidivism and sibling delinquency: A model of
primary prevention and program evaluation. Journal of Consulting and
Clinical Psychology, , –.
Kupersmidt, J. B., Griesler, P. C., DeRosier, M. E., Patterson, C. J., &
Davis, P. W. (). Childhood aggression and peer relations in the
context of family and neighborhood factors. Child Development, ,
–.
Larson, J. & Lochman, J. E. (). Helping schoolchildren cope with anger: A cognitive-behavioral intervention. New York: Guilford Press.
Leff , S. S., Power, T. J., Manz, P. H., Costigan, T. E., & Nabors, L. A.
(). School-based aggression prevention programs for young chil-
dren: Current status and implications for violence prevention. School
Psychology Review, , –.
268
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 280/289
Lochman, J. E. (). Cognitive-behavioral interventions with aggressive
boys: Three-year follow-up and preventive eff ects. Journal of
Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E. (). Contextual factors in risk and prevention research. Merrill Palmer Quarterly, , –.
Lochman, J. E. (). Translation of research into interventions.
International Journal of Behavioral Development, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Barry, T. D., Powell, N., Boxmeyer, C., & Holmes, K. (in
press). Externalizing conditions. In M. L. Wolraich, P. H. Dworkin,
D. D. Drotar, & E. C. Perrin (Eds.), Developmental and behavioral
pediatrics. Philadelphia, PA: Elsevier.
Lochman, J.E., Boxmeyer, C.L., Powell, N.P., Roth, D., & Windle, M.(). Masked intervention eff ects: Analytic methods for addressing
low dosage of intervention. New Directions for Evaluation, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Boxmeyer, C., Powell, N., Wojnaroski, M., & Yaros, A. (in
press). The use of the Coping Power Program to treat a -year old girl
with disruptive behaviors: A case study. Journal of Clinical Child and
Adolescent Psychology.
Lochman, J. E., Burch, P. R., Curry, J. F., & Lampron, L. B. ( ).
Treatment and generalization eff ects of cognitive behavioral and goalsetting interventions with aggressive boys. Journal of Consulting and
Clinical Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Coie, J. D., Underwood, M., & Terry, R. ().
Eff ectiveness of a social relations interventions program for aggressive
and nonaggressive rejected children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., & The Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group
(). Screening of child behavior problems for prevention programs atschool entry. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., & Dodge, K. A. (). Social-cognitive processes of
severely violent, moderately aggressive, and nonaggressive boys.
Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., & Dodge, K. A. (). Distorted perceptions in dyadic
interactions of aggressive and nonaggressive boys: Eff ects of prior
expectations, context, and boys’ age. Development & Psychopathology,
, –.Lochman, J. E., FitzGerald, D. P., Gage, S. M., Kannaly, M. K., Whidby,
J. M., Barry, T. D., Pardini, D. A., & McElroy, H. (). Eff ects of
social-cognitive intervention for aggressive deaf children: The Coping
Power Program. Journal of the American Deafness and Rehabilitation
Association, , –.
269
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 281/289
Lochman, J. E., FitzGerald, D. P., & Whidby, J. M. (). Anger manage-
ment with aggressive children. In C. Schaefer (Ed.), Short-term psy-
chotherapy groups for children (pp. –). Northvale, NJ: Jason
Aronson.Lochman, J. E., & Lampron, L. B. (). Situational social problem-
solving skills and self-esteem of aggressive and nonaggressive boys.
Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Lampron, L. B., Burch, P. R. & Curry, J. F. (). Client
characteristics associated with behavior change for treated and untreat-
ed aggressive boys. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E. Lampron, L. B., Gemmer, T. C., & Harris, S. R. ().
Anger-coping interventions for aggressive children: Guide to imple-mentation in school settings. In P. A. Keller & S. Heyman (Eds.),
Innovations in clinical practice: A source book, Volume , Sarasota, FL
Professional Resource Exchange.
Lochman, L. E., Lenhart, L. A., & Wells, K. C. (). Coping Power
Program: Child Component. Unpublished manual: Duke University
Medical Center, Durham, NC.
Lochman, J. E., Magee, T. N., & Pardini, D. (). Cognitive behavioral
interventions for children with conduct problems. In M. Reinecke &D. Clark (Eds.), Cognitive therapy over the lifespan: Theory, research and
practice (pp. –). Cambridge, England: Cambridge University
Press.
Lochman, J. E., Nelson, W. M., III, & Sims, J. P. (). A cognitive behav-
ioral program for use with aggressive children. Journal of Clinical
Child Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Pardini, D. A., Phillips, N. C., & McElroy, H. K. ().
Conduct disorder in adolescence. In P. Graham (Ed.), Cognitive behav-iour therapy for children and families (nd ed., pp. –).
Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
Lochman, J. E., Powell, N., Boxmeyer, C., Deming, A., & Young, L.
(). Angry and aggressive youth. In R. W. Christner, J. L. Stewart,
& A. Freeman (Eds.), Handbook of cognitive-behavior therapy (CBT)
groups with children and adolescents: Speci fi c settings and presenting prob-
lems (pp. –). Oxford, England: Routledge Publishing.
Lochman, J. E., Powell, N. R., Jackson, M. F., & Czopp, W. ().Cognitive-behavioral psychotherapy for Conduct Disorder: The
Coping Power program. In W. M. Nelson III, A. J. Finch, & K. J. Hart
(Eds.), Comparative treatment of Conduct Disorder (pp. –). New
York: Springer.
270
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 282/289
Lochman, J. E., Powell, N. R., Whidby, J. M., & FitzGerald, D. P. ().
Cognitive-behavioral assessment and treatment with aggressive chil-
dren. In P. C. Kendall (Ed.), Child and Adolescent Therapy: Cognitive-
Behavioral Procedures (rd ed., pp. –). New York: Guilford Press.Lochman, J. E., Qu, L., Chen, L., Roth, D., Barth, J., & Wells, K. C.
(, March). Influence of neighborhood characteristics on the
Coping Power program’s eff ects on children’s behavior and parenting
processes. Paper presented in a symposium (S. F. Reardon &
D. Gorman-Smith, chairs) at the biennial meeting of the Society for
Research in Child Development, Boston, Massachusetts.
Lochman, J. E, & Wayland, K. K. (). Aggression, social acceptance,
and race as predictors of negative adolescent outcomes. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.
Lochman, J. E., Wayland, K. K., & White, K. J. (). Social goals:
Relationship to adolescent adjustment and to social problem solving.
Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Lochman, J. E. & Wells, K. (). A social-cognitive intervention with
aggressive children: Prevention eff ects and contextual implementation
issues. In R. Dev. Peters & R. J. McMahon (Eds.), Prevention and
early intervention: Childhood disorders, substance use, and delinquency (pp. –). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (a). Contextual social-cognitive medi-
ators and child outcome: A test of the theoretical model in the Coping
Power Program. Development and Psychopathology, , –.
Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (b). The Coping Power Program at the
middle school transition: Universal and indicated prevention eff ects.
Psychology of Addictive Behaviors, , S–S.
Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (). Eff ectiveness study of Coping Power and classroom intervention with aggressive children: Outcomes
at a one-year follow-up. Behavior Therapy, , –.
Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (). The Coping Power program for
preadolescent aggressive boys and their parents: Outcome eff ects at the
one-year follow-up. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, ,
–.
Lochman, J. E., Wells, K. C., & Murray, M. (). The Coping Power
program: Preventive intervention at the middle school transition. InP. Tolan, J. Szapocznik, & S. Sambrano (Eds.), Preventing youth sub-
stance abuse: Science-based programs for children and adolescents
(pp. –). American Psychological Association: Washington, DC.
Loeber, R. (). Development and risk factors of juvenile antisocial
behavior and delinquency. Clinical Psychology Review, , –.
271
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 283/289
Loeber, R., Green, S. M., Keenan, K., & Lahey, B. B. (). Which boys
will fare worse?: Early predictors of the onset of conduct disorder in a
six-year longitudinal study. Journal of the American Academy of Child
and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.Loeber, R., & Stouthamer-Loeber, M. (). Development of juvenile
aggression and violence: Some common misconceptions and contro-
versies. American Psychologist, , –.
Lavallee, K. L., Bierman, K. L., Nix, R. L., & the Conduct Problems
Prevention Research Group (). The impact of first-grade “friend-
ship group” experiences on child social outcomes in the fast track pro-
gram. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Luthar, S. S. (). Poverty and children’s adjustment. New York: Sage.Masten, A. S., Best, K. M., & Garmezy, N. (). Resilience and develop-
ment: Contributions from the study of children who overcome adver-
sity. Development and Psychopathology, , –.
McCarty, C. A., McMahon, R. J., & Conduct Problems Prevention
Research Group (). Mediators of the relation between maternal
depressive symptoms and child internalizing and disruptive behavior
disorders. Journal of Family Psychology, , –.
Milich, R., & Dodge, K. A. (). Social information processing in childpsychiatric populations. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, ,
–.
Miller-Johnson, S., Coie, J. D., Maumary-Gremaud, A., Bierman, K., &
Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group (). Peer rejection
and aggression and early starter models of conduct disorder. Journal of
Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Miller-Johnson, S., Coie, J. D., Maumary-Gremaud, A., Lochman, J. E.,
& Terry, R. (). Relationship between childhood peer rejection andaggression and adolescent delinquency severity and type among
African American youth. Journal of Emotional and Behavioral
Disorders, , –.
Nagin, D., Pogarsky, G., & Farrington, D. (). Adolescent mothers and
the criminal behavior of their children. Law and Society, , –.
Pakasiahti, L., Asplund-Peltola, R., & Keltlkangas-Jarvinen, L. ().
Parents’ social problem solving strategies in families with aggressive
and nonaggressive boys. Aggressive Behavior, , –.Pardini, D. A., Barry, T. D., Barth, J. M., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C.
(). Self-perceived social acceptance and peer social standing in
children with aggressive-disruptive behaviors. Social Development, ,
–.
272
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 284/289
Pardini, D. A., Lochman, J. E., & Frick, P. J. (). Callous/unemotional
traits and social cognitive processes in adjudicated youth. Journal of the
American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.
Pardini, D. A., Lochman, J. E., & Powell, N. (). Shared or uniquedevelopmental pathways to callous-unemotional traits and antisocial
behavior in children? Journal of Clinical Child and Adolescent
Psychology, , –.
Pardini, D., Lochman, J. E., & Wells, K. C. (). Negative emotions and
alcohol use initiation in high-risk boys: The moderating eff ect of good
inhibitory control. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Patterson, G. R., Reid, J. B., & Dishion T. J. (). Antisocial boys.
Eugene, OR: Castalia.Patterson, G. R., Reid, J. B., Jones, R. R. & Conger, R. E. ( ). A social
learning approach, Vol. . Families with aggressive children. Eugene, OR:
Castalia.
Patterson, G. R., Dishion, T. J., & Yoerger, K. (). Adolescent growth
in new forms of problem behavior: Macro- and micro-peer dynamics.
Prevention Science, , –.
Pepler, D. J., Craig, W. M., & Roberts, W. I. (). Observations of
aggressive and nonaggressive children on the school playground. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, , –.
Pinderhughes, E. E., Nix, R., Foster, E. M., Jones, D., & Conduct
Problems Prevention Research Group (). Parenting in context:
Impact of neighborhood poverty, residential stability, public services,
social networks and danger on parental behaviors. Journal of Marriage
and Family, , –.
Poulin, F., Dishion, T. J., & Burraston, B. (). -year iatrogenic eff ects
associated with aggregating high-risk adolescents in cognitive-behavioralinterventions. Applied Developmental Science, , –.
Rabiner, D. L., Lenhart, L., & Lochman, J. E. (). Automatic vs. reflec-
tive social problem solving in relation to children’s sociometric status.
Developmental Psychology, , –.
Raine, A., Brennan, P., & Mednick, S. A. (). Interactions between birth
complications and early maternal rejection in predisposing individuals
to adult violence: Specificity to serious, early onset violence. American
Journal of Psychiatry, , –.Rasanen, P., Hakko, H., Isobarmi, M., Hodgins, S., Jarvelin, M. R., &
Tiihonen, J. (). Maternal smoking during pregnancy and risk of
criminal behavior among male off spring in the northern Finland
birth cohort. American Journal of Psychiatry, , –.
273
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 285/289
Rigby, K. (). Bullying in schools and what to do about it. London: Jessica
Kingsley.
Sampson, J. H., & Laub, R. J. (). Crime in the making: Pathways and
turning points through life. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.Scaramella, L. V., & Conger, R. D. (). Intergenerational continuity of
hostile parenting and its consequences: The moderating influence of
children’s negative emotional reactivity. Social Development, ,
–.
Scarpa, A., Bowser, F. M., Fikretoglu, D., Romero, N., & Wilson, J. W.
(). Eff ects of community violence II: Interactions with psy-
chophysiologic functioning. Psychophysiology, (Supplement), .
Scarpa, A., & Raine, A. (). Violence associated with anger and impul-sivity. In J. C. Borod (Ed.), The neuropsychology of emotion
(pp. –). London: Oxford University Press.
Schwab-Stone, M. E., Ayers, T. S., Kasprow, W., Voyce, C., Barone,
C., Shriver, T., & Weissberg, R. P. (). No safe haven: A study of
violence exposure in an urban community. Journal of the American
Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.
Shaw, D. S., Keenan, K., & Vondra, J. I. (). The developmental
precursors of antisocial behavior: Ages –. Developmental Psychology, , –.
Shaw, D. S., & Vondra, J. I. (). Infant attachment security and mater-
nal predictors of early behavior problems: A longitudinal study of low-
income families. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, , –.
Tremblay, R. E., & LeMarquand, D. (). Individual risk and protective
factors. In R. Loeber & D. P. Farrington (Eds.), Child delinquents:
Development, intervention, and service needs (pp. –). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage.van de Wiel, N. M. H., Matthys, W., Cohen-Kettenis, P. T., Maassen, G. H.,
Lochman, J. E., & van Engeland, H. (). The eff ectiveness of an
experimental treatment when compared with care as usual depends on
the type of care as usual. Behavior Modi fi cation, , –.
van de Wiel, N. M. H., Matthys, W., Cohen-Kettenis, P., & van Engeland, H.
(). Application of the Utrecht Coping Power program and care as
usual to children with Disruptive Behavior Disorders in outpatient clin-
ics: A comparative study of cost and course of treatment. Behavior Therapy, , –.
Vitaro, F., Brendgen, M., Pagani, L., Tremblay, R. E., & McDuff , P. ().
Disruptive behavior, peer association, and conduct disorder: Testing
the developmental links through early intervention. Development and
Psychopathology, , –.
274
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 286/289
Wasserman, G. A., & Seracini, A. M. (). Family risk factors and inter-
ventions. In R. Loeber & D. P. Farrington (Eds.), Child delinquents:
Development, intervention, and service needs (pp. –). Thousand
Oaks, CA: Sage. Webster-Stratton, C. (). Randomized trial of two parent-training pro-
grams for families with conduct-disordered children. Journal of
Consulting & Clinical Psychology, , –.
Webster-Stratton, C. (). Advancing videotape parent training: A com-
parison study. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –.
Webster-Stratton, C., & Hammond, M. (). Treating children with early-
onset conduct problems: A comparison of child and parent training
interventions. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, , –. Webster-Stratton, C, & Reid, M. J. (). The Incredible Years Parents,
Teachers, and Children Training Series. In A. E. Kazdin & J. R. Weisz
(Eds.), Evidence-Based Psychotherapies for Children and Adolescents
(pp. –). New York: Guilford Press.
Weiss, B., Dodge, K. A., Bates, J. E., & Petit, G. S. (). Some conse-
quences of early harsh discipline: Child aggression and maladaptive
social information processing style. Child Development, , –.
Williams, S. C., Lochman, J. E., Phillips, N. C., & Barry, T. D. (). Aggressive and nonaggressive boys’ physiological and cognitive
processes in response to peer provocations. Journal of Clinical Child &
Adolescent Psychology, , –.
Wright, J. C., Giammarino, M., & Parad, H. W. (). Social status in
small groups: Individual-group similarity and the social “misfit.”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, , –.
Zelli, A., Dodge, K. A., Lochman, J. E., Laird, R. D., & Conduct Problems
Prevention Research Group (). The distinction between beliefslegitimizing aggression and deviant processing of social cues: Testing
measurement validity and the hypothesis that biased processing medi-
ates the eff ects of beliefs on aggression. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, , –.
Zonnevylle-Bender, M. J. S., Matthys, W., van de Wiel, N. M. H., &
Lochman, J. (). Preventive eff ects of treatment of DBD in
middle childhood on substance use and delinquent behavior. Journal
of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, , –.
275
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 287/289
This page intentionally left blank
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 288/289
277
About the Authors
John E. Lochman, PhD, ABPP, is Professor and Doddridge Saxon
Chair in Clinical Psychology at The University of Alabama, where he
also directs the Center for Prevention of Youth Behavior Problems.
Dr. Lochman has over publications on risk factors, social cognition,
and intervention and prevention research with aggressive children,
including outcome research on the Coping Power intervention.
Dr. Lochman is Editor-in-Chief of the Journal of Abnormal Child
Psychology , serves on the NIH study section on Psychosocial
Development, Risk and Prevention, and is President of the AmericanBoard for Clinical Child and Adolescent Psychology.
Karen C. Wells, PhD, is Associate Professor of Medical Psychology in the
Department of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences at Duke University
Medical Center, where she is the Director of the Family Studies Program
and Clinic and also the Director of the Psychology Internship for Duke
University Medical Center. Dr. Wells is widely published in the areas
of psychosocial treatments for childhood and adolescent psychiatricdisorders, including ADHD, oppositional defiant disorder, depression,
and adolescent suicidality, with a special emphasis on family and parent-
ing factors in etiology and treatment. Dr. Wells has worked with
Dr. Lochman on the development and evaluation of the Coping Power
Program for the last years.
Lisa A. Lenhart, PhD, is the senior psychologist in the Testing and Tutoring
Service at The Treatment and Learning Centers (TLC) in Maryland. Sheis a child clinical psychologist who has provided diagnostic and thera-
peutic services to children and families for over years, using research-
based treatments to help individuals with a variety of difficulties to function
more eff ectively in life. She has extensive supervision experience, both of
8/11/2019 John Edward Lochman, Karen C. Wells, Lisa a. Lenhart Coping Power Child Group Program Facilitator Guide 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/john-edward-lochman-karen-c-wells-lisa-a-lenhart-coping-power-child-group 289/289
professionals and students, and consults with other professionals on an